Home
        Specification
         Contents
1.                                    The response follows the normal response for function code 16 given in section 3 7  and  so to the above message the response would be  02 10 00 04 00 03 CRC CRC    43 TV 25 30 Iss 2 GLO June 06 UK 215    Modbus Function Codes    Analogue Input Value   Analogue readings in engineering units  4byte IEEE floats using 2 Modbus registers per  reading    Communications Input    Values can be sent to the recorder for inclusion in the Maths Block  using command 16 up  to 32 IEEE floats can be sent to the recorder  Using CV1 to CV32 in the Maths Block  these  values can be displayed on the pens     i e  P1   CV1 will set Pen 1 to the engineering value set address 1880 with the function code  16  Once again these are 4 byte IEEE floats using 2 Modbus registers per reading    Pen Values   Pen values in engineering units  4 byte IEEE floats using 2 Modbus registers per reading     Modbus Function Codes  These are described in document Modbus   Serial Communications User manual  51 52   25 66P  4 06     Pages 14 to 25  inclusive  For X Series recorders only use codes 01  02  03 04  16 and  17     Supplemental to Function code 16 with standard address 0004 can be used to send   Supplemental to Function code 17  Report Device ID    e Page 23   Slave ID for X Series recorders is always 05    e Page 24   Device description       Item Size in bytes Contents          Device Description 16d  0x10 Recorder type space software version  The length is extended to 
2.                 43 TV 25 30 Iss 2 GLO June 06 UK 27    Functions and Features    Features    Display      5 5    Colour Active TFT for the Minitrend QX and 12 1    Colour Active TFT for the  Multitrend SX   with more than 256 000 colours makes it easy to interpret process data  and take action with the intuitive bar charts  digital values  trends or customised displays  A  screen saver function can be set from 1 to 720 minutes to extend the life of the backlight       Touch Screen   the heavy duty durable touch screen provides easy data entry and rapid  navigation though the menus       Help Files   A complete contextual help system can be accessed and visualised on the  screen of the recorder     Communications    e Ethernet Connectivity   the Ethernet  DHCP standard  connection  with support for vari   ous protocols  provides comprehensive connectivity to local area networks  LANs   The  standard Ethernet interface makes networking of the recorder to a LAN or the world wide  web fast and convenient  Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol  DHCP  automatically  acquires the settings  IP address  for network communications from a DHCP server       RS485 Modbus   the RS485 connection allows process data to be transferred to other  devices  or to record data received in MODBUS RTU protocol  slave mode only      e Simple Network Time Protocol  SNTP    The recorder can be synchronised over the eth   ernet network via a SNTP client or synchronise other recorders via a Server       Web
3.               Alarm Marker marks  the chart to show when  Pen 1 was out ofits  alarm state       Pen Digital Read out                         Touch the screen to activate a short cut to  Settings such as change the chart speed       43 TV 25 30 Iss 2 GLO June 06 UK 119       120    Menu Bar  At the top of each process screen is the Menu bar     Recorder ID and Name  alternates with the  Screen Name             er ae F  Menu 1 18h 78 Screen       Date and Time    Menu    This gives direct access to the Menu System to set up the recorder  See    Section 4  Re   corder Setup    on page 35     Alarm bell  1     The second button shows the Alarm status  When the alarm bell is green this means there  are no active alarms  If the bell is red then an alarm is active and the number of active alarms  will display below     Press this button to produce the Alarm menu bar  Here there is an Acknowledge button to  confirm any alarms that require acknowledgment  these may be normal or latched alarms   See    Alarms Menu    on page 55  There is a View button that displays all pens currently  with alarms set up  The Detail button will take you straight to the Alarms menu  see    Alarms  Menu    on page 85    Time Left  18h     This button shows how much time is left before data will fill the internal memory and an ex   port of the memory to an external device is required  before data is overwritten  Select this  button to go to the Recording screen to export the data now or set up a timed exp
4.              Messages                   Al  31    Alari    E   3     Back    Messages Menu   No  Login required  All of the  Messages buttons require  No Login access  Permis   sion Area 1                              gt a Recording a    Recording Currently 4 pens recording     2  Start Stop    Export  required in 18h 12 minutes  oie Schedule  8   Inactive  Export Now Scheduled    4 Back                Recording Menu   No Login  required  This is a view only  screen  All of the buttons on  the Recording menu re   quire Operator access    Permission Area 11     43 TV 25 30 Iss 2 GLO June 06 UK    Figure 5 2 Default password access from the Configure menu                  Layout menu   Supervisor access   All of the Layout menu buttons  require Supervisor access    Permission Area 24     Setup menu   Technician access     See Figure 5 3 for Setup menu  access   Permission Area 18        i Layout a              amp   Configure menu   Operator access En     se     Load     Permission Area 13     Setup   Technician access 4 J   Layout   Supervisor access  Passwords   Operator access  Settings   Supervisor access                               2  Settings LA Passwords    User Admin    Change Pwds    Back Finish Back             Settings menu   Supervisor access Password menu   Operator access     See Figure 5 4 for Password menu     Permission Area 23        access   Permission Area 36        43 TV 25 30 Iss 2 GLO June 06 UK 113    114    Figure 5 3 Default Password access from the 
5.           162 43 TV 25 30 Iss 2 GLO June 06 UK    20 to 50V DC    20 to 30VAC Input Common Relay  Instrument supply Output    Analogue  Input or  Analogue  Output    CJC  Sensor    Analogue  Input or  Pulse  Input    Alarm    Digital IO       24V TX Power RS 485  Supply Output       43 TV 25 30 Iss 2 GLO June 06 UK 163    164    Table 10 2         Multitrend SX   Spares          51453012 501    SX Processor Board Assy                                                                      2 51453006 501   SX Analogue Input 4CH Assy  51453006 502   SX Analogue Input 6CH Assy  51453006 503   SX Analogue Input 8CH Assy  2 51453027 501   SX Analogue Output 2CH Assy  51453027 502   SX Analogue Output 4CH Assy  2 50001017 502   SX Pulse Input 4CH Assy  3 51453024 501   SX Mother Board Assy  4 51453018 501   SX Digital I O 8CH Assy  51453018 502   SX Digital I O 16CH Assy  4 51453021 501   SX Relay Alarm 4CH Assy  51453021 502   SX Relay Alarm 8CH Assy  5 50001182 501   SX Power Supply AC Mains  50001182 502   SX Power Supply 20 50VDC 20   30VAC  6 51453030 501   SX Transmitter Power Supply board  11 50013946 501   SX Bezel Touch Screen Std and Includes Bezel  Touch  Nema 3 IP55 Door Screen and Door  50013946 502   SX Bezel Touch Screen and Nema  4X IP66 Door Assy  14   50009119 501   SX Std Nema 3 IP55 Door  15   50003590 501   SX Nema 4X IP66 Door  23   50001782 501   QX   SX Speaker Assy  27   50006787 501   QX   SX Battery  kit of 5  Not shown  28   50001011 502   Compact Flash car
6.          Start  Stop and Reset Totals  buttons require Technician access   Permission Area 15     View requires No Login   Permission Area 4     Max Min Menu   No Login required                                     LE   Reset Max Min  Reset Max and Reset  Min buttons require Technician access    TA  t Max Ming 4 4    Permission Area 16   4 EI View requires No Login    Permission Area 6        Figure 5 9 Default password access from the General Menu    MG i General Menu   Supervisor access     Genera  Permission Area 20     ia Ident  Localisation and Factory require  Localisation   Engineering access   Permission Area 28           Batch requires Supervisor access  Permis   sion Area 22     Printer       Printer requires Supervisor access  Permis   sion Area 21           Groups require Supervisor access  Permis   sion Area 26        Factory a  B SE 8i      Credits FW Upgrade Calibration       Factory menu requires Engineering  access  All of the factory menu buttons          AA  AR    require Engineering access    Permission Area 28     Demo Traces Reset Setup Delete All Data             43 TV 25 30 Iss 2 GLO June 06 UK 117    Figure 5 10 Default password access from the Comms Menu    Comms Menu   Engineering access   Permission Area 29     Modbus   Permission Area 30  Web   Permission Area 31  SNTP   Permission Area 32    Ethernet   Permission Area 33             Figure 5 11 Default password access from the Web page       Honeywell   g fa  0001 Minitrend                Xu   dea
7.         g Alarms P      se a 4   a x  MEI  Configure Alarms Screen Ack Alarm Configure View                a        F     Batch Recording Messages  102   9 Pl  Status Finish Back Finish    Acknowledging Alarms                            User acknowledgment of alarms can be performed at this menu  Latched and Normal  alarms can be acknowledged     If a latched alarm is set up in the Pen  Alarms menu then a latched relay will maintain in its  active state until the trigger source has returned to a no alarmed state and the alarm has  been acknowledged     A latched alarm will continue to flash  if an alarm marker is displayed  until it is acknowl   edged and in a non alarm state  Normal alarms can also be acknowledged  See Alarm  Markers for flash colour identification     Ack Alarm   All   Select this button to acknowledge all active alarms  latched and normal alarms       By Group   Select this button to acknowledge any alarms in a group of pens  Pen groups  can be set up in the Pens menu      By Pen   Select this option to acknowledge any alarms for individual pens     Configure  This will display all available Pens with alarms set up   To change the configuration  select the desired pen  this will display the alarm details   Select the Edit button to change the alarm level   If the Edit button is greyed out go to the    Alarms Menu    on page 55 menu and select the  alarm  then activate Allow Change    View    This will display all available Pens with alarms set up  To view 
8.        xl   x a                            CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 CH5 CH6 CH7 CH8    Figure 2 6 Input signal wiring    Active Burnout Passive Burnout    Volts mV Thermocouples Thermocouples Current   ITS  l lx    lx    t   f 10R d   Ve  ve  ve  ve    ve  ve V   Ne  Ohms s      4 wire R T 3 wire R T 2 wire R T     jt      x             x   ve optional Pel  connection    16 43 TV 25 30 Iss 2 GLO June 06 UK    Electrical Installation          CAUTION    CONTROL UNIT DAMAGE    Do not apply a hazardous live voltage between   and   pins within a channel   eg  60V  maximum on voltage ranges  1 2V maximum on millivolts ranges   Do not apply a volt   age above 1 2V to the   pin           Failure to comply with these instructions may result in product damage       CJC Connectors    The CJC connector resides between channel 4 and channel 5 on the Analogue Input card   For information on connecting the CJC sensor  see Figure 2 5 on page 16     Analogue Output Card    The Analogue Output card connections are made via 1 x 12 way screw terminal plug that  fits into a PCB header on the rear of the unit     The Analogue Output card position for the Minitrend QX is shown in Figure 2 3 on  page 13  and Figure 2 4 on page 14 for the Multitrend SX     A WARNING    HAZARDOUS VOLTAGES   Insulation from channel to channel  Normally a channel can be safely connected to a  hazardous voltage up to 300V AC common mode    with respect to earth  However   where a channel is connected to a safety low voltage circ
9.      Edit Setup     Main Menu  gt  Configure  gt  Setup  gt  Edit Setup     The Edit Setup gives access to sub menus for Field IO  Pens  Comms  Recording and for  General recorder set up  See    Edit Setup    on page 41     Save Setup     Main Menu  gt  Configure  gt  Setup  gt  Save   The Save button will produce a list of destinations to save the set up to     The Compact Flash and the front USB device port are found under the front flap on the re   corder  There is another USB port at the rear of the recorder  The first USB device fitted will  be USB1  therefore the second USB device fitted is USB2     Load Setup     Main Menu  gt  Configure  gt  Setup  gt  Layout     Setups can be loaded from Compact Flash or USB key  The Load button will produce a list  of source files to load setups from     The Compact Flash and the front USB device port are found under the front flap on the re   corder  There is another USB port at the rear of the recorder  The first USB device fitted will  be USB1  therefore the second USB device fitted is USB2     Back Button    Takes you back to the previous menu    43 TV 25 30 Iss 2 GLO June 06 UK    Edit Setup     Main Menu  gt  Configure  gt  Setup  gt  Edit Setup     Edit Setup will access the main configuration of the recorder through further sub menus for   Field IO  Pens  Comms  Events  General and Screen recorder set up     The Edit button may display a warning message if the Commit Later option has been select   ed This means changes to th
10.      Tighten the screw using a flat blade screwdriver and the clamp will secure    against the panel           A CAUTION    CONTROL UNIT DAMAGE    Do not over tighten mounting clamp screws   Minitrend QX torque setting should be 0 5   0 75Nm 4 4   6 6lbf in    Multitrend SX torque setting should be 0 5   0 70Nm 4 4   6 2lbf in  Failure to comply with these instructions may result in product damage          Multitrend SX    1     Insert the panel gasket onto the recorder so it goes between the back of the  recorder bezel and the panel  From the front panel  place unit in the panel and  push through the panel       To loosen each clamp  unscrew the long screw to accommodate the panel    thickness       From behind the panel  the orientation of the clamp should be with the screw    head towards the rear of the unit  See Figure 2 2 on page 11      Position the circular mounting boss in the hole on one side of the case with the    lip of the boss inside the case  Ensure the front of the clamp is up against the  panel       Fix the second clamp on the opposite side of the unit  See Figure 2 4 on    page 14      Tighten the screw using a flat blade screwdriver and the clamp will secure    against the panel     43 TV 25 30 Iss 2 GLO June 06 UK    Mechanical Installation    Mounting Clamp Diagram    Figure 2 1 QX Mounting clamp    2 mounting clamp  positions  one re   quired on either side  of the unit    Mounting clamp slots       Figure 2 2 SX Mounting clamp    4 mounting clamp  pos
11.     Data replay facility on chart displays at normal  fast or slow speeds with zoom and cursor        Display Chart Speeds    Chart rates  1 mm hour  5 mm hour  10 mm hour  20 mm hour  30 mm hour  60 mm hour  120  mm hour  600 mm hour  1200 mm hour  6000 mm hour  Combinations of rates can be mixed and  chart speeds can be set independently for each chart  Display speeds are independent of logging  rate       Messages Screen          The message screen displays system information and records any setup activity that has been  changed  It also provides warning and error message updates  lists alarm activity and will display  user defined marks on a chart        174    43 TV 25 30 Iss 2 GLO June 06 UK       Specification Tables       Specification    Design Attributes          CE Conformity  CE Mark     Immunity Product Classification    Enclosure Rating    Installation Requirements       This product conforms with the protection requirements of the following European Council Direc   tives  73 23 EEC  the Low Voltage Directive  and 89 336 EEC  the EMC Directive  Conformity of  this product with any other    CE Mark    Directive s  shall not be assumed     Complies with EN61326 Class    Cord Connected  Panel Mounted Industrial Control Equipment  with protective earthing  grounding    EN 61010 1     Front panel designed to NEMA3   IP55  Optional NEMA 4X   IP66     Category Il  Overvoltage  EN 61010 1   Pollution Degree 2          EMC Standards Emissions   EN61326 Class B  Immunity 
12.     Rate   1 Min      Alarm Rate Units Seconds    Alarm Rate 10 Sec      Rate   10 Sec    Alarm Rate Units Milliseconds    Alarm Rate 500ms  2Hz  iy    mo Am j    Pen Logging can be set to log as Continuous or Fuzzy          Click on Logging to set up each logging profile per pen     e Enabled   Toggles On and Off to activate or de activate logging for this  pen       Type   Toggles between Continuous or Fuzzy logging   Continuous logs every value based on the Method chosen  Sample  Aver   age or Max Min    Fuzzy Logging has been developed as a secure data storage technique    43 TV 25 30 Iss 2 GLO June 06 UK 53    54    which has a self teaching data storage algorithm so the recorder stores  data at a variable rate to match the process being monitored  Fuzzy Log   ging has intelligent resources to enable the most effective and efficient way  of using the scan rate  storage capacity and recording time  See    Appen   dix F  Fuzzy Logging    on page 205    Rate Units   Set the Units for the logging rate to be displayed  Select and  choose the logging rate units from the drop down menu     Rate   This is the speed at which data is required to be logged    If the Millisecond option is selected as the Rate Units for the logging  then  a drop down menu of options will appear  When all other Rate Units are  selected a keypad will appear for user entry  Fastest rate is 20mS and slow   est is 60 hours     Alarm Rate Units   Set the Units for the Alarm logging rate to be displayed   S
13.     Screen Designer Screens    Screen Designer screens  known as Layouts  file type  lay  can be created in the Screen  Designer software on your PC and then loaded onto the recorder  This can be done via  Compact Flash or USB transfer  Templates created in Screen designer can also be loaded  into the recorder  added to a recorder screen or screens and displayed     Loading a Template into a Recorder    One or more Templates can be loaded into a recorder  added to a recorder screen or  screens and displayed  To save a template in Screen Designer onto removable media refer  to the Screen Designer manual     Fit the removable media into the recorder and go to Main Menu  gt  Configure  gt  Layout and  select Load  The Device selection menu will appear to select the correct media  Enter a new  file name if required and press the Load button     Go to Main Menu  gt  Configure  gt  Layout  gt  Edit and select Add Screen  Go to the Template  Type option and your template will be listed here  Select your template and it will be added  to a screen  re name the screen as required     To display the new Layout go to the Screen button in the Main menu bar at the top of any  process screen and select the next button to scroll through the screens     Loading a Layout into a Recorder    One or more Layouts can be loaded into a Recorder and displayed  To save a Layout in  Screen Designer onto removable media refer to the Screen Designer manual     Fit the removable media into the recorder an
14.     Static Electricity                   43 TV 25 30 Iss 2 GLO June 06 UK    Protocols used in this manual    Table 1 2   Safety Symbols       Symbol    Meaning             A    Directive 2002 96 EC  WEEE  Waste Electrical and  Electronic Equipment             Static Electricity    All circuit boards and electronic modules associated with this recorder contain components  which are susceptible to damage caused by electrostatic discharge  Should it be necessary  to handle such components  appropriate precautions in accordance with ANSI ESD S20 20    Electrostatic Discharge Control Program Standard  should be observed     Protocols used in this manual    Safety and Symbol Identification    Table 1 3         Symbol    Description          A WARNING    The WARNING symbol indicates a potentially  hazardous situation  which  if not avoided  could  result in death or serious injury        A CAUTION    This CAUTION symbol may indicates a potential   ly hazardous situation  which  if not avoided  may  result in property damage        NOTICE          A NOTICE symbol indicates important informa   tion that must be remembered and aids in job  performance        Warnings and Safety Precautions    Do   s and Don   ts    1  Before any connections are made to the recorder  ensure the protective earth terminal  is connected to a protective conductor before applying power or any other connections           FN WARNING    IMPROPER INTERRUPTION OF CONNECTIONS   Any interruption of the protective 
15.    Eine  a nn re Me nn ane E Bae a encens dr ar Une ae dis te LP   Specification OPOS sentent nn his 178  Specification Environmental and Operating Conditions    179  DED  Flash Codes  mnrantin etch ater esha sites See RAAB a 180  Appendix A  Quality and Safety ns 181  CE Mark   usscssrscssscsssssssssesssscsssessnseseessessesessessesessesessesessessssessssesesseseesesseees 181  SAFELY cvscssscesssesnousceaseossscisescdsesusieseosssassenssed sees ccasvansousestdsoasecssedensevsedassenssunsen 181  Appendix B  Maths Expressions            ccsscsseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 183  Full Maths  amp  Script Processing   ssssesesesesosesoosesosossoosseserososoosososesosossesssossssose 183  Maths Variable and Function Tables    184  FUL MGth sess cree iavccd al arn ana 190  Script Function Application Examples     191  Maths Error Messages  nissan nine msn nn er tenait 195    43 TV 25 30 Iss 2 GLO June 06 UK    Appendix C  Thermocouple Connections sn              How Thermocouples Work  se essessesesoeseeoeeceseeoeseeeonseeoesesoesosseeoeseeooseesoreeeoesesoe  Thermocouple CJC Compensation  Internal Automatic oossoo  Ext OC Reference  sine in en lin Mt lente nt  External with a Specified Temperature ss 199  External Input Reference    200  Appendix Dz Alarms cms red asnn ae see nn enene 201  Alarms Menu ER nn RENE LMD RER BE a SA ea LAS RTE 201  Appendix E  Ethernet iiscatinciontevesniddnabbiiteentenbnetdnunbicibanmlannaadiatcnitasisenibetinnentasas 203  Ethernet  
16.    Specification Tables    Specification Tables       Specification Design Attributes    Digital indicators and Display QX Recorder   Display size and Type  5 5    diagonal  Digital Colour LCD  TFT  with Touch Screen   Industrial grade with brightness adjustment and wide viewing angle   Resolution  QVGA  320 x 240 pixels     Screen Saver  Set in minutes from 1 to 720  can be set to dim the screen or to switch off   Brightness adjustment  Adjustable between 10 and 100   default set to 80  brightness   Backlight life time  55 000 hours to half brightness when used at 100   100 000h  if used at  80    Maximum luminosity 400 cd m     Touch Screen life  1 000 000 touches   SX Recorder   Display size and Type  12 1    diagonal  Digital Colour LCD  TFT  with Touch Screen  Industrial grade with brightness adjustment and wide viewing angle   Resolution  SVGA  800 x 600 pixels     Screen Saver  Set in minutes from 1 to 720  can be set to dim the screen or to switch off   Brightness adjustment  Adjustable between 10 and 100   default set to 80  brightness   Backlight life time  43 000 hours to half brightness when used at 100   Maximum luminosity 400  cd m     Touch Screen life  1 000 000 touches             Display Update Rate Display values updated every second       Status Display A status bar  at the top of the recorder   s screen  displays the real time icons of the recorder sta   tus  such as Time left and alarm active        Communications Ethernet 10 100 base   T with RJ45 conne
17.    closed paddlock  Security Access Failure   No entry sign  User Mark on Chart and Batch  User Start   Logging or Totals  User Stop   Logging or Totals  User Pause   Logging or Totals  A User Reset   Logging or Totals                43 TV 25 30 Iss 2 GLO June 06 UK    Process Menu     Main Menu  gt  Process   If Max Min or Totals are set up in the recorder they can be controlled from this screen        Process    Ce es    Back    Controls for any process in use        e Max Min   Reset Max Min  Maximum or Minimum values by categories   e Totals   Start  Stop  Reset or View Totals by categories    Note on Groups  Groups of pens need to be set up to use this feature  see    Pens Menu    on page 51    Max Min   Main Menu  gt  Process  gt  Max Min     Reset all Maximum and Minimum values by categories or just reset max or min values  The  categories are     All   Select this to reset all values     By Groups   If Groups of pens have been set up this can be used to reset the max min val   ues for particular groups of pens  To set up Groups see    Pens Menu    on page 51    By Pen   Select this to reset max min values for individual pens   View   Use the View button to just display the max min values for each Pen     Totals   Main Menu  gt  Process  gt  Totals     Select a button to Start  Stop or Reset Totals  These can be controlled by the following cat   egories     All   Select this to start  stop or reset all Totals     By Group   If Groups of pens have been set up this can b
18.   23  USB host  24X TX Power Common  Supply Relay   Output  Analogue Input  20 to 50 VDC 20 a or Pulse Input  to 30VAC Input  Instrument  power    LES CJC Sensor    Analogue Input   Analogue Output    RS485 Alarm Digital IO       158 43 TV 25 30 Iss 2 GLO June 06 UK    Table 10 1                                                                                       Minitrend QX   Spares  1 51453012 502   QX Processor Board Assy  2 51453006 501   QX Analogue Input 4CH Assy  51453006 502   QX Analogue Input 6CH Assy  51453006 503   QX Analogue Input 8CH Assy  2 51453027 501   QX Analogue Output 2CH Assy  51453027 502   QX Analogue Output 4CH Assy  2 50001017 502   QX Pulse Input 4CH Assy  3 51453009 501   QX Mother Board Assy  4 51453018 501   QX Digital I O 8CH Assy  51453018 502   QX Digital I O 16CH Assy  4 51453021 501   QX Relay Alarm 4CH Assy  51453021 502   QX Relay Alarm 8CH Assy  5 51453015 501   QX Power Supply AC Mains  51453015 502   QX Power Supply AC TX  51453015 503   QX Power Supply 20V 55VDC 20   30VAC  7 50013945 501   QX Bezel Touch Screen and Std Nema   Includes Bezel  Touch  3 IP55 Door Assy Screen and Door Assy  50013945 502   QX Bezel Touch Screen and Nema 4X   IP66 Door Assy  9 50003508 501   QX Nema 4X IP66 Door  10   50009118 501   QX Std Nema 3 IP55 Door  16   50006685 502   QX Bezel Touch Screen Display As  Includes Bezel Touch  sembly NEMA 4X IP66 Screen Assy  Door   Display  Speaker  In   verter  cables and  Mounting Bracket  19   51453076 501   QX 
19.   Active 100Mb Full Duplex and the status of  the IP address eg  Dynamic 160 220            Go Back to return to the previous screen or select Print to print the screen     43 TV 25 30 Iss 2 GLO June 06 UK 103    Finish    104    Finish    Media     Main Menu  gt  Status  gt  Diagnostics  gt  Media   e Drive   If media is inserted this will display a lists the drives available   e Size   If media is inserted this will display the size of the media will be displayed    e Free   If media is inserted this will display how much free space is available  Eg  USB2 size  is 256MB of which 190MB is free     e Status   Displays the current status of the media eg  Being re cycled  Schedule Inactive      Setup files   Displays the type of files that can be loaded into the recorder eg   set   lay   tpl  Go Back to return to the previous screen or select Print to print the screen     When the Finish button is pressed at the end of a new set up or a change to a setup the  following options are available     Commit    This will save the new setup or changes to an existing setup  over writing the existing one   and implement them into the recorder    Field validation is performed when a change has been made  if a problem is identified  an  error message is shown and the field in question clearly marked     Discard    This will ignore the new setup  or the changes that have been made to the existing setup   and not implement them into the recorder    Commit Later    This gives the user the opt
20.   Communications Server    User Preferences    General Settings   Timing Setups            m User Settings Clear Setup Cache    Start Server Minimised    Iv  Show Diagnostics E Clear Setup Cache    E    Send Recorder Events                    Network Settings  Use NIC Default IP Address Selection za    Using Local Host fi 60 221 36 107    NIC IP Selection  Local Host  160 221 36 107                   Preferences   The Timing Setups tab displays the current timings for the current com   munications setup  These entries should be configured correctly and not require any  changes by the user       Contents   Enables the Help files        About Communications Server   Gives the version of the software     Add a new Device to a communications port   Lun       pt Use this icon button as one way of adding a device to Communications port  Other   ways of adding a device are to right click on the desired port in the left window ie    Ethernet  and select the Add Device option  Or select a comms port in the left window  right  click in a clear space in the top window and select Add Device     Configure Database Logging    Use this icon button to configure a device for logging channels to a database  Oth   er ways to configure logging are to right click on a comms port or a device in the  left window  or a device in the top window displaying the device for that port     Connect to a new Database Server    Use this icon button to connect to a database server  either a Local  or Remote   
21.   Connections are made via 2 x 12   way screw terminal plugs that fit into a PCB header on the rear of the unit  The 2 way CJC  sensor should remain fitted in the central 2 way header     The Minitrend QX can have two analogue input cards fitted giving up to 16 input channels   2 x 8 channel cards   The slot positions are A  amp  B  these are identified on the rear panel on  the back of the unit  Either slot can be used  it is recommended that slot A is used if only one  card is fitted     The Multitrend SX can have up to 6 analogue input cards fitted  up to 48 input channels   The slot positions A  B  C  D  E or F  these are identified on the rear panel  PC boards are  fitted in order  slot    A    starts from the top     For more information of setting up calibration for an Analogue card  see    Calibration    on  page 71     A WARNING    HAZARDOUS VOLTAGES   Insulation from channel to channel  Normally a channel can be safely connected to a  hazardous voltage up to 300V AC common mode    with respect to earth  However   where a channel is connected to a safety low voltage circuit  an immediately adjacent  channel must be adequately insulated from hazardous voltages between 150V AC  and 300V AC max  This insulation should comprise of at least 1 5mm air gap  or a bar   rier rated greater than 1400V AC  This is to ensure that protection of the safety low  voltage circuit is fully maintained       Common Mode voltage is a voltage applied between the whole channel and earth   n
22.   EN61326 Industrial Levels   Safety Complies with EN61010 1  2001  Panel Mounted Equipment  Terminals must be enclosed within  the panel    Specification Analogue Inputs          Number of Inputs    QX recorder can have 4  6  8  12 or 16 input channels  SX recorder can have 4  6  8  12  16  24   32  40 or 48 input channels       Input Types    mV  V  mA with external shunt  provided as standard   Thermocouple  RTD and ohms       Minimum Input Span    Range is fully configurable with span limitation of the operating range selected with 4  under  range to 4  over range capability  50V Range 2         Burnout  T C     High  Low or None       Cold Junction Compensation    Internal compensation with the ability to manually adjust values  External Input for compensation   External CJC value specified       Input Resolution    0 0015   16 Bit ADC        Input Impedance    Current loop resistance  10 ohms  use  0 1  external resistor  Volts  gt 1MQ  all other  gt 10MQ       Source Impedance    T C and RTD  100 ohms per lead maximum  CU10   15 ohms        Square Root Extraction    Available as standard on every input type       Sensor Compensation    Single point and Dual point       Input Sampling Rate    QX Recorder has 2 available slots and the SX Recorder has 6 available slots with up to 8 analog  inputs each  the input sampling rate is dependent on actuation type    All Inputs  100mS  10Hz   200mS  5Hz   500mS  2Hz    Fast Sampling  20mS  50Hz    mA  mV  Ohms and Volts only     
23.   Scales  Linear  amp  Logarithmic    Normal and Scientific notation   Decimal Point automatic or programmable   Engineering units  user definable  10 characters    First channel in Screen Layout determines the display chart scale   Logarithmic  1 to 99 decades  recommend up to 20 decades on one screen to ensure clarity        Input Isolation    300VAC channel to channel  channel to ground       Noise Rejection   at 50 60HZ     2           Common mode  2Hz    120dB  5Hz    120dB  10Hz    120dB  Normal Mode  2Hz    85dB  5Hz    80dB  10Hz    48dB       43 TV 25 30 Iss 2 GLO June 06 UK    175       Specification Tables       Specification    Logging          Logging Method    Sample  Average  Min Max   can be set independently per pen       Logging Types    Continuous  Fuzzy       Logging Rate    From 20 msec  to 60 hours per pen       Fuzzy Logging       A secure data storage technique which delivers data compression ratio of 100 1 or more  self  teaching  storing the data at a variable rate to match the process             Specification    Physical Parameters          Enclosure Bezel    Zinc plated steel case with high impact resistant polycarbonate bezel  scratch resistant lens   NEMA 3 IP55 protection rating standard  Optional NEMA 4X   IP66  Front face only        Mounting Panel    Unlimited mounting angle  For the best view of the display the viewing angle should not exceed  65   from the left or right  65   looking down and 40   looking up at the recorder display  Mounti
24.   The replay screen has DPMs that display max min readings  for each pen  For full details see    Replay    on page 123     Screen List     Main Menu  gt  Screen  gt  Screen List     The Screen button produces a list of all available screens  Select to make this the current  screen active on the recorder     To add a new screen  go to Add Screen in  Main Menu  gt  Configure  gt  Layout  gt     Edit Lay   out    on page 78    Clean Screen    The Clean Screen function disables the touch screen for 30 seconds so that the screen can  be cleaned  A dialog box will appear informing you    You have 30 seconds to clean the  screen  Press escape if you wish to close this dialog early     The escape key option would  only be available if a USB keyboard was plugged in  The box will also display a time bar to  show the 30 seconds of time lapsing  See    Cleaning Instructions    on page 167     43 TV 25 30 Iss 2 GLO June 06 UK    Batch Setup Batch Control     Main Menu  gt  Batch   Batch is a firmware option which can be activated from    Credits    on page 70     The Batch function allows the user to segment portions of data for further analysis  Setting  up a batch requires information to identify where the batch starts and stops  Batch data can  also be paused  for viewing  and resumed  A batch can be aborted at any time  if so this will  not register as a batch  a batch is only complete when it has been stopped     Only one batch can be run at a time  stop the first batch before start
25.   e Minitrend QX has a 5 5    Digital Colour LCD  TFT   QVGA Resolution  320 x 240 pixels     e    Multitrend SX has a 12 1    Digital Colour LCD  TFT   SVGA Resolution  800 x 600 pix   els     e Clear and intuitive operation  Industrial rugged Touch Screen  with rapid navigation    e Custom build screens in the recorder or using Screen Designer    43 TV 25 33 GLO Iss 2 June 06 UK 25    Functions and Features    Comprehensive Connectivity  e 10 100 Ethernet  DHCP   Web and OPC Server  e TCP IP and RS485 Modbus Protocol    e USB ports for keyboard  mouse and printer    Data Storage    On board non volatile memory   up to 2GB    e Removable Compact Flash and USB storage  See    Storage Media Format    on  page 90  for formatting information of Compact Flash cards and USB keys      e No moving parts   all solid state data storage    Security Stringent   Total Data integrity  e Password Protection   21CFR Part 11      ESS   Extended Security System    Plus      e Health Watch for preventative maintenance   e Remote Access   Advanced Software Data Analysis at your PC  e Independent Chart and Logging speeds   e Global Language Support   e Rapid review and replay of data at recorder   e Approvals   CE  CSA  UL  FM     NEMA 4X   IP66 option     Up to 50Hz  20 msec  Logging     Upto 16 Analogue Inputs for the Minitrend QX     Up to 48 Analogue Inputs for the Multitrend SX  e Remote Viewer via the recorder web page   e Events   e Batch    e Print Support    26 43 TV 25 30 Iss 2 GLO Jun
26.   erating frequency for pulse inputs on the Digital I O card is 1KHz max     To view and log a channel selected as a Pulse input  set up an extra pen with a Maths func   tion of LPULn in Edit Maths in the Pens menu  For more information see    Appendix B   Maths Expressions    on page 183     For connection details see For connection details See    Alarm Relay Channel Numbers     on page 21    43 TV 25 30 Iss 2 GLO June 06 UK 47    48    Figure 4 2 Example of Digital IO    re  S M     Edit Setup Field 1 0 Mlarm Digital 10   Menu path to current menu  E     Digital 1 0 1      D1  Pulse Input  Hz  be a          The Digital IO screen      Digital 1 O 2   af D2  Input displays all the available  channels that can be set     Digital JO3      D3  Pulse Input  Hz  je   up to be digital inputs or  outputs      Digital 1 O 4     D4  Input be   P    Each channel displays     Digital JOS      DS  Output Relay  244  hh   its individual settings      Digital I 06   Y D6  Output Relay  24v  J gt    M ae oa he cok       Select a numbered    sd figuration of each input  or output     For all cards select an Alarm Digital   to display the configuration menu  Each Alarm Digital  has a list of menu items to be configured     Enabled   Toggle On and Off    Digital Type   Set to Output Relay contact  Power  for the Alarm Relay  cards  Toggle between Input and Output or Pulse Input for the Digital 1O  card  On the 4 Relay Alarm card  only output type is available  Channels 1  to 6 on the 8 Alarm R
27.   fa   0001 QX  Main Menu   y  4 Screen 20 Feb06 10 49 21    10 47 00 10 45 00 10 49 00 100 00 Pen 1  20 Jan 06 20 Jan 06 20 Jan 06   50 00    Pen 2  50 00    Pen 3  50 00    Pen 4  50 00          43 TV 25 30 Iss 2 GLO June 06 UK 35    36    2  Log On Off    If Password  ESS   Extended Security System  21CFR  security is active on your recorder  a password is required to enter the menu system and process screens  Limited access is  available without logging on     For ESS recorders only  locate the First Time Password System Setup sheet included in  with your recorder or see    First Time    Password System Setup    on page 106    All Users   When Log On is required the Log On button will appear in the top right of the Main Menu    screen  The Log On button can be set to switch to auto Log Off at a specified period of time   To Log On select the Log On button at the top right of the Main Menu screen         Log On Button    can  E    Log Off Button      Log On   User is presented with a user name and password entry box  First time user login  is    Admin     No password is required  Access for the first time user is removed once the  password system has been configured       Log Off   Once the user has logged on  the option in the Main Menu will turn to Log Off   once selected the user is logged off and returned to the current process screen     First Time Log On    The first time the system is used a default user name and password is available  the user  name is    Admin    
28.   option  This is the highest value of the engineering range  and corresponds to the top of the input range  Select and enter a value  using the on screen keyboard     Eng  Zero    Ohms  Volts and Amps only   Only available when not using     Use Pen Scale    option  This is the bottom of the engineering scale and  represents the bottom of the input scale  Select and enter a value using the  on screen keyboard     Units    Ohms  Volts and Amps only   This is the Units of Measurement for  each input  Select and enter a value  Max 13 characters  For Thermocouple  and Resistance Thermometer units  see    Localisation    on page 69     Label   Select and enter a identification label for the input  Select and enter  a label  Max 15 characters     43 TV 25 30 Iss 2 GLO June 06 UK    45    46       e SQRT Extract    Ohms  Volts and Amps only   Toggle On and Of  The  square root extraction in the analogue input is used to linearise a non linear  input       Sensor Comp   Sensor Compensation may be required to improve accu   racy on a sub range  This is an adjustment to the value of the signal input  on each channel  based on the Engineering units settings  See    Sensor  Compensation    on page 211    e Demo Setup   Only available if there is no Analogue Input card fitted   Examples of various inputs are available without having an actual signal  input coming into the recorder     ee Demo Type   Select this for a list of available Demo Type inputs     ee Cycle Time   Enter the Cycle 
29.   select to change the current screen     Prev   Displays the previous enabled screen in current selection      Next   Displays the next enabled screen in current selection    e    Exit   Exit this menu  return to the current process screen    Edit  Screen Properties     Main Menu  gt  Screen  gt  Edit     The Edit button takes you to your current process screen and displays the Edit toolbar at the  top of the screen     In Edit mode you can select items on the screen and assign channel information to them     Expert Non Expert button    The screen is made up of widgets and objects  the Expert button switches between being  able to select widgets and objects     A widget is a container for one or many objects  Objects display data in graphical forms such  as Bar  Scale  DPM  Text     43 TV 25 30 Iss 2 GLO June 06 UK 121    To select a widget the Expert button must be disabled and will show a red cross     widget  has green grab handles that appear when it is selected  To select an object the Expert but   ton must be active  with no red cross showing  When a widget or object is selected it can be  moved and resized     Channel Mapping    Map button    The Map button  in the Screen Menu bar  enables the user to associated channels to pens  so the pen being displayed on the object or widget will display the actual signal on that chan   nel     Channel Mapping Widgets    Channel configuration can be done per widget or per object  Configure the widget if all the  objects on the wi
30.   to capture the shape correctly     Diagram 1    Points marked  O are NOT logged  as they lie on an    imaginary    straight line between points  marked     The graph of the Fuzzy Logged data  looks identical to the graph of the sampled data  but  has taken less than half the points to build it     What about    Spikes    on my trend line  Won   t it miss them     NO  you will not miss any    Spikes        Glitches    or    Transients        these are what you need to  see     As Fuzzy Logging is an adaptive technique  it will log as fast as it needs to in order to capture  everything     Although not all points are logged  the base    Scan Rate    of the input is the same as if you  were using a standard logging technique     43 TV 25 30 Iss 2 GLO June 06 UK    What about slowly drifting inputs     Again     No Problem  The algorithm is processed in    Real Time     i e  as the reading is taken   As it already knows the previous logged readings it can calculate where the next point  should be  assuming it   s on a straight line      if the measured value does not equal the pre   dicted value  the point is logged as it no longer forms part of the straight line     Fuzzy Logging  looks for straight lines     at any angle  Not just on the horizontal     Do you have any examples   Example 1   Flow  amp  Pressure Measurement of Mains Water Pressure    A recorder was installed  to monitor the flow of a mains water supply  At peak demand the  mains pressure had been subject to sha
31.  12 Volt buzzer  connect it to the  normally open  NO  contacts  unless the fail safe setting is activated      The maximum voltage which may be used with the alarm relays is 240V    Alarm Relay Channel Numbers    The Alarm Relay cards are either 4 or 8 channels with a full length connector taking up 8  channels even though the cards only operate on 4 channels or 8 channels  The 8 channels  Alarm Relay card has 2 digital inputs available on the last 2 channels  There are no Digital  Inputs available on the 4 channels Alarm Relay card                       Table 2 5    Alarm Relay card 4 channel Alarm Relay card 8 channel  Card Channel Digital Card Channel Digital  position number Inputs position number Inputs  Slot G 1to4 N A Slot G 1to 8 7 amp 8  Slot H 17 to 20 N A Slot H 17 to 24 23  amp  24  Slot   33 to 36 N A Slot   33 to 40 39  amp  40                                  43 TV 25 30 Iss 2 GLO June 06 UK 21    Electrical Installation    Figure 2 8 Alarm Relay Card connector details    CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 CH5   CH6 CH7   CH8       NCCNO NCCNO NCCNO NCCNO NCCNO NCCNO NCCNO NCC NO    Relay contacts position    eS   Channels 7 and 8 can   oe ela Closed be set as Digital Inputs     Souter  Use C and NO     NO   Normally Open    8 and 16 Digital Input Output Card    The Digital Input Output Card has 1A 24V DC rated relays that are connected via two 16   way connectors  the left connector for the first 8 channels and right connector for the second  8 channels  The pin outs for 8 and 
32.  2 GLO June 06 UK    Configure Menu     Main Menu  gt  Configure  gt      The Configure screen gives access to the Setup  Layout  Password menus and Settings   Time and Date   The majority of the recorder configuration is done in the Setup menus     e Setup   In the Setup menu the user can configure how the recorder  acquires  stores and actions data  The Edit Setup gives access to sub   menus for Field IO  Pens  Comms  Recording and for General recorder set  up  See    Edit Setup    on page 41    e Layout   The user can configure how the data is presented on the screen   From the Layouts screen choose to Edit  Saved or Load layouts in the  recorder  See    Layout    on page 78    e Passwords   Manages the security and access to full password configura   tion that allows restricted access within the recorder  providing password  protection at different levels  Administrate  Load and Save passwords from  this menu  See    Passwords    on page 80    e Settings   Recorder settings such as Set Time to configure the recorder s  time and date  See    Settings    on page 83     P        Select a button to take you to the next menu             43 TV 25 30 Iss 2 GLO June 06 UK 39    40    Setup Menu     Main Menu  gt  Configure  gt  Setup     In the Setup menu the user can configure how the recorder acquires  stores and actions da   ta  The Setup screen gives access to the Edit menu where the majority of the recorder con   figuration is done  also Save and Load setups from this screen
33.  3 8                   Safety Guidelines      Keep batteries out of the reach of children  especially those batteries fitting within the limits  of the truncated cylinder as defined in ISO DP 8124 2 2        Inthe case of ingestion of a cell or battery the person involved should seek medical assist   ance promptly       It is of extreme importance that batteries are inserted into equipment correctly with regard  to polarity    and          Do not attempt to revive used batteries by heating  charging or other means     Do not dispose of batteries in fire       Do not dismantle batteries     43 TV 25 30 Iss 2 GLO June 06 UK 213      Do not short circuit batteries     e Batteries should be disposed of in accordance with local regulations  they must not be dis   posed of with normal refuse        214 43 TV 25 30 Iss 2 GLO June 06 UK    Appendix J  Function Codes and Memory Maps    Modbus Memory Map Supplement     Refer to document Modbus   Serial Communications User manual  51 52 25 66P  04 06        Start  Address   Hex     End See  Address Description Appendix   Hex  51 52 25 66P          1800    185F Analogue Input Value  48 inputs max   A 5       1880    18BF Communications Inputs  32 comms values max    A 6       2400    247F Extended Comms Inputs  64 comms values max    A 6       18C0    197F Pen Values  96 pens max   A 7       1B00                   1B7F Totalisers  64 totalisers max   A9         Communications Inputs can be set by using Modbus function code 16    NOTE  So
34.  43 TV 25 30 Iss 2 GLO June 06 UK    177    Specification Tables                                                 Input Actuation Range Temp  Input   Linear  Stability     Impedance  N   Nicosil Nisil   328 to 212  200 to 100 5 8 8 2 0 01     C  212 to 2372 100 to 1300 2 0 1 1  Chromel Copel   58 to 1112  50 to 600 1 1 0 6 0 01     C  P   Platinel  32 to 2534 0 to 1390 2 5 1 4 0 01     C  D  32 to 356 0 to 180 6 3 3 5 0 01     C  356 to 3344 180 to 1840 4 2 2  3344 to 4515 1840 to 2490 11 7 6 5  PT100      0 00385  328 to 1562  200 to 850 ti 0 6 0 01     C  PT200  328 to 1562  200 to 850 1 1 0 6 0 01     C  PT500  328 to 1562  200 to 850 1 1 0 6 0 01     C  PT1000  328 to 1562  200 to 850 1 1 0 6 0 01     C  100 ohm Nickel  76 to 356  60 to 180 0 9 0 5 0 01     C  120 ohm Nickel  112 to 500  80 to 260 0 5 0 3 0 01     C  Cu10  328 to 500  200 to 260 0 7 0 4 0 01     C  Cu53 32 to 302 0 to 150 0 5 0 3 0 01     C                         Reference Temperature  22  C Reference Sample Rate  2Hz  500msec    Reference Humidity  65  RH    15  Long term stability  0 2  year     Does not includes reference junction calibration of  1 0    C using the standard    ice bath    method of calibration  Factory accuracy can be im   proved by performing a field calibration  Also does not include any error on the sensor       Tolerance for these input types includes that of the external shunt resistors  0 1  tolerance        Specification    Pulse Input  optional     Options          4 isolated i
35.  50   40     Low Alarm Level       Alarm activated  at this point        0     Totaliser Menu   Main Menu  gt  Configure  gt  Setup  gt  Edit Setup gt  Pens  gt  Totaliser     The Totals option must be active to use this option  See Table 7 1     Firmware Options      on page 129     The Totaliser function is normally associated with flow monitoring applications  The input to  the recorder would be a measure of flow rate  eg  In litres per second  and the total amount  that has flowed over a specified time period  Multiple totalisations are possible with the use  of extra pens  firmware Credit option   Totalisation values are 10 digits plus exponent     Select Totaliser from the Pen screen to display the totalising setup menu   Totaliser menus showing Normal and Sterilisation types    Menu path to current menu       _       RS    4 RT an   en z  Type Type   Sterilisation    Tag Tag Total 1    Add to Msgs Add to Msgs PA      Units Temp Input U      Celsius  Time Factor Start Temper      100 000                 43 TV 25 30 Iss 2 GLO June 06 UK 57    58    Click on Totaliser to set up the totalising profile per pen     Enabled   Toggles On and Off to activate or de activate totalising for this  pen     Type   Select this for a list of Types of totalising  Normal or Sterilisation   Normal totaliser function is usually associated with flow monitoring applica   tions    Sterilisation  is where items are subjected to heat over a period of time   Each pen can be totalised according t
36.  53      Figure 18 1 Fuzzy logging tolerance settings              q Band 1    q Band 2    lt 7 _ Trace    Band 2    lt  lt  Band 1        43 TV 25 30 Iss 2 GLO June 06 UK    Appendix G  F sub zero Sterilisation    121 1    TPC    The significance of Fo    The Fg value is used in the pharmaceutical and related industries in the sterilisation of items   A brief summary is included here to give the essence of the meaning of the terms used     When items are subjected to sterilisation by heating  the rate at which micro organisms are  killed is dependent on the temperature     Traditionally items were sterilised by holding them at 250   F    121 11   C   and the Fg value  for a sterilisation is simply the equivalent time at this temperature that would produce the  same effect  For many  average  micro organisms each minute at 121 11   C reduces the  number present by a factor of 10  so a 15 minute hold at this temperature would reduce the  number by a factor of 1015     Time min       Time min  D       20 30    Figure 1 Figure 2    If it were possible to heat a sample from ambient to 121 11   C in 1 second  hold it there for  15 minutes  and then cool it back to ambient in 1 second  the temperature   time profile  would look something like the trace in Figure 1 on page 209 and the F  value would be  15  representing 15 minutes at 121 11   C     In practice  of course  to reach this temperature the object would have to be subject to an  initial heating period up to that temperatu
37.  93    Slovak Republic  Honeywell s r o    Phone   421  2 58247 410  FAX   421 2 58247 415    Spain   Honeywell S A    Phone   34  0 91313 61 00  FAX   34  0 91313 61 30    Sweden   Honeywell AB   Phone    46  8 775 55 00  FAX    46  8 775 56 00    Switzerland  Honeywell AG   Phone   41 18552448  FAX    41  1 855 24 45    Turkey   Honeywell Turkey A S   Phone   90 216 575 6600  FAX   90 216 575 6637    Ukraine   Honeywell   Tel    380 44 201 44 74  Fax   380 44 201 44 75    United Kingdom  Honeywell Control Systems  Ltd    Phone   44  0 1334 655034  FAX   44  0 1334 655554    MIDDLE EAST    Abu Dhabi U AE   Middle East Headquarters  Honeywell Middle East Ltd   Phone   971 2 4041220  FAX   971 2 4432536    Sultanate of Oman  Honeywell  amp  Co Oman LLC  Phone   968 701397   FAX  968 787351    Saudia Arabia   Honeywell Turki Arabia Lim   ited   Phone   966 3 341 0140  Fax   966 3 341 0216    Kuwait  Honeywell Kuwait KSC  Phone   965 2421327    AFRICA    Mediterranean  amp  African  Distributors   Honeywell SpA   Phone   39  02  250 10 604  FAX   39  02  250 10 659    South Africa  Republic of   Honeywell Southern Africa  Honeywell S A  Pty  Ltd   Phone   27 11 6958000  FAX  27 118051504    NORTH AMERICA    Canada   Honeywell LTD   Phone  1 800 737 3360  FAX  1 800 565 4130    USA   Honeywell Process Solu   tions    Phone  1 800 343 0228  FAX  1 815 235 6545    LATIN AMERICA    Argentina   Honeywell S A 1 C    Phone    54 11  4383 3637  FAX    54 11  4325 6470    Brazil   Honeyw
38.  94 93       en 6  11 533  en 7  22 77    ens  42 05             Vertical Chart  8 Horizontal Bars  and 8 DPMs    43 TV 25 30 Iss 2 GLO June 06 UK    Minitrend QX Rear Connections    Wire seal  Earth screw   ground    AC supply  20 to 50VDC  100   250VAC    20 to 30VAC Input    Instrument power  Common Relay       Analogue Input   Output  SPNC   Analogue Output    or Pulse Input  Slot      a a o  Slot B UPRY PUIS  Alarm or CJC Sensor  Digital I O  Slot G   Ethernet  naga USB Host    100 250VAC Rear Panel AC power is connected via the  standard configuration IEC chassis plug on the rear panel       43 TV 25 30 Iss 2 GLO June 06 UK 33    Multitrend SX Rear Connections    AC supply                      Wire seal  100   250VAC  er Analogue Input    ee a oe i Pulse Input  Earth screw Slot A   ground  Slot B  Slot C  Slot D  20 to 50VDC   Analogue Input    20 to 30VAC Pulse Input  Input Instrument Analogue Output  power Slot E  Common Relay Hi  Output  SPNC   Alarm or  Digital I O  24V TX Power  Slot G  Supply Output Slot H  Slot    CJC Sensor  Slots A to F Ethernet  RS485 USB Host    100 250VAC Rear Panel AC power is connected via the standard  configuration IEC chassis plug on the rear panel       43 TV 25 30 Iss 2 GLO June 06 UK    Section 4  Recorder Setup    Power up    Configuration of the recorder is performed in the Menu screens and the data is displayed in  the Process screens  This section takes you through the Menu system and how to set up  your recorder  See    Section 
39.  Chart     In Cursor mode the cursor bar can be moved along the chart showing the  max min pen readings as they change and is displayed on the DPMs  This can be done by  touching the line cursor on the screen and dragging it to either side  In Chart mode the chart  can be moved along behind the cursor bar  The DPMs will update reflecting the max and  min readings at the position of the cursor bar  This can be done by touching the chart on the  screen and dragging it to either side     Screen Activity  Chart Speeds    This is the speed at which the chart travels across the screen  There are three categories   Slow  Medium and Fast  default  chart speeds that can be set up in    Charts    on page 77     To change the chart speed gently tap the touch screen on a chart to activate the Settings  button in the top right of the screen  Press the Settings button to produce a drop down list  of the 3 chart speed categories  Select the desired speed and this will immediately change  the chart speed on all screens that have charts     124 43 TV 25 30 Iss 2 GLO June 06 UK    a 2 A Touch the screen to    03 20 00     produce the Settings    button     Select Settings to  produce the chart  speeds menu                  ii    AR       i  tt          Alarm Markers    Alarm markers appear when an alarm is setup in the Pen Alarms menu  Hi   A F and Low alarm markers appear as a triangle on a DPM or Bar  pointing up  for a Hi alarm and down for a Low alarm  See    Alarms Menu    on  page 55    
40.  Deviation Alarm Markers    These are diamond shape markers  Deviation is how far this pen can de    amp  4 viate from the Ref Pen before triggering an alarm     See    Alarms Menu    on page 55  to set up the alarm Type  Deviation Level and the Ref  Pen     Alarm Marker Flash Colours  For Hi  Low and Deviation alarms                       Table 6 1    Alarm Markers Flash Colour  ae Pink flash In alarm not acknowledged  latched or normal alarm  A Yellow flash In alarm acknowledged  latched or normal alarm   amp  Cyan  blue  flash Out of alarm not acknowledged  latched only  Grey Out of Alarm                   43 TV 25 30 Iss 2 GLO June 06 UK 125    126    Pen Pointers    Pen Pointers appear on a scale next to a chart when no bars are present  They move to dis   play the real time value  Each pen pointer is numbered according to its associated pen and  will flash yellow when that pen goes into an alarm state  Pen pointers will change direction  and point up or down when a pen signal goes off scale     Mark on Chart    There are two different types of Mark on Chart  automated or user  An automated Mark on  Chart can be set up for       An Alarm going in and out of an alarm state     Start  Stop or Reset Totals  e Batch control such as Start  Stop  Pause  Resume and Abort batch     e Generated by an effect of an Event    Figure 6 4 Mark on Chart    Pen out of alarm Batch stopped    Pen into alarm Totals started User    0001 Turbine 1             A user Mark on Chart is activated
41.  Diagnostics Status E  Connect to a Database Server Digital IO Card Connections              Database ovens 8 and 16 Digital Input Output Cards  Database Logging sous TO OT Channel NUMDESS ner  Delete a Database     ccccsccsssessssessssesssseessecsstecsseeesses DIMENSIONS oeesccssesssesssesssssssssssesssesssesssesssssssessssssesssiees  Delete a Device u s  Discard Configuration ss  T sement Display  Overview stat  Local Area Network cc  Displaying Totals sssi  Logging Configuration         0   0 0   Network Settings wee  OPC Clients issue  Preferences oo    cececcceeeseseeseeeeeeees E  Remote Networks          cccecseeeees  SEP invente  Shutdown  ssssssssssssssssissssesssisersesnereseee ESS  E ded S  ity S  Software Installation                an Xtended SECUTUY SYSTEM asins 106  Summary of Logging Changes Edit ind ne E E EEE E  Comms  Overview nn  Edit Layout              Communications Connections Add Screen               Ethernet Connections o   c ccceccccscscessssessssesseseeseesesees Delete Screen  RS485 Connections        ccccccceeees en Edit Setup osn  Compact Flash Format p Edit  Screen  Configure Alarms s a Electrical Installation woecccecccsssesccssssssssisssssssssssees 12  Configure Menu    s 24V DC Input  Edit Layout AC Power    ccecce Re E  Layout nn _ Alarm Relay Card Connections        eee 20  Load Layout i  Analogue Input Card oo  eeeeeeeseeseseeneeeeeene  Passwords          ee Analogue Output Card  Save Layout     Cables ou    arnan  Setup Menu   Comms Connec
42.  Enabled   Toggle On and Off     e Type   Select this for a list of available Signal Inputs     e Sample Rate   Select this for a list of available Analogue Input sample  speeds  A Fast Scanning range of 50Hz  20ms  is available as a firmware  option  See    Firmware Credit System    on page 129     e Range  Ohms  Volts and Amps only    Toggle between Preset and User  Defined  The Preset option will make available a list of Range Types or  select User Defined to specify High and Lower Limits    e Range Type  Ohms  Volts and Amps only    Only available when Range is  set to Preset  Select for a list of available ranges  The factory default range  is    12V  See    User Defined Maximum Input Ranges    on page 170   e Voltage Units  Volts only    Select Volts or Millivolts     e High Limit   Available when Range is User Defined  Select and enter the  high limit value     e Lower Limit   Available when Range is User Defined  Select and enter the  lower limit value     e RT Type   Only available when Type is set to RT  Resistance Thermome   ter   Select this for a list of available RT types     43 TV 25 30 Iss 2 GLO June 06 UK    Burnout Type   Only available when Type is set to TC  Thermocouple    Toggle between Active and Passive  Active means it will send out a current  to the TC  Set to Passive means it takes a reading without sending out a  current  The T C is wired differently for Active an Passive Burnout  see  Figure 2 6     Input signal wiring     on page 16      Show Bur
43.  IO     Select which type of Field Inputs Outputs are required for configuration depending on what  type of cards are fitted in the recorder     JUUL  a  gt   gt   Analogue In Analogue Out Alarm Digital 10    g     AL   4  Pulse Inputs       Select a button to take you to the next menu  e Analogue In   Select this to configure each Analogue Input channel  See     Analogue In Menu    on page 44    e Analogue Out   Select this to configure each Analogue Output channel   See    Analogue Out Menu    on page 46    e Alarm Digital IO   Select this to configure Relay Alarm Output card or Dig   ital Input Output card  See    Alarm   Digital 10    on page 47    e Pulse Inputs   Select this to configure each Pulse Input channel  See     Pulse Input    on page 49    43 TV 25 30 Iss 2 GLO June 06 UK    43 TV 25 30 Iss 2 GLO June 06 UK    Table 4 1   Card Positions and Channel Numbers                                                                      Minitrend QX  i Channel  Slot position Card type n  mber  s  Slot A 8 Analogue In 1to8  Pulse Inputs 1to4  Slot B 8 Analogue In 9 to 16  Pulse Inputs 9 to 12  4 Analogue Out 9 to 12  Slot G 4 Relay Output 1 to 4  8 Relay 2 Digital In 1 to 8  8 Digital Input Output 1 to 8  16 Digital Input Output 1to 16  Table 4 2    Multitrend SX  Bp Channel  Slot position Card type n  mbers  Slot A 8 Analogue In 1to8  Pulse Input 1to4  Slot B 8 Analogue In 9 to 16  Pulse Input 9 to 12  Slot C 8 Analogue In 17 to 24  Pulse Input 17 to 20  Slot D 8 Analogue 
44.  Permissions Table    o s 109  Levels  PASS WOKGS  sin nn 82  Load Layout een ee 79  Load Setup scursmndsssntrnsinisapasriscmndacninhonsie 40       219    Local Area Network  COMMS Server mn  Local Settings tie sera  Default Time Zone occ es  Localisation oeeceeeeccecsesstesseesessseeseene    Temp Units  nissan bas  Time ZONE oiccecccccccccsscscssescssesesscscescseesesecseeseseeesseeseees    Main MENU c  Alarms Menu    seeren  Batch Commands           ccccceeeeeeeees  Batch Mark on Chart  Batch Setup Control  Confipure ainsi  Edit  Screen Menu           cccceees  Layt ssranmersaneoneanesm  Messages Menu ou    eects  Passwords  o e  ccecsccsscssesessceseeseesesseeseees  Process Menu    s es  Recording Menu nesses  R  play ss trnnrins  nemininins  Screen List wou  cecesesceeeeeeeeeeees NoN  Screen Meni Ra n nannti  Setup Menu  reniri aiai  Status Menu    s src ra   Main Menu Access   Maintenance  Backlights  Calibration        Cleaning sienne  Operating Temperature s s s 167  Touch SCREEN 5454 the nn   Maintenance Status   Map DIU cba eee tea   Mark on Chart nn   Maths Error Messages    s   Maths Expressions occ   Full Maths oo    Full Maths  amp  Script Processing  Maths Variable and Function Tables           0000    184  Script Function Application Examples                 191   Maths Variable and Function Tables           184   Maths using commenting    sssi 195   Max Min Reset nee    Mechanical Installation ea  Dimensions ass ntanamunnimannminian  Installation Instructions 
45.  Server   with the recorder connected to a LAN  all process variables  alarm and mes     sages can be viewed from an internet browser with automatic refresh     Data Storage    Internal Data Storage   At least 70MB expandible internal non volatile flash memory is  available for data storage and chart history  replay of data on the display         Internal memory   Logging rate   1 sec                         Type Pens   70MB   180MB   400MB   890MB   1850MB  QX 8 24days 61d 137d 301d 622d  QX  SX 16 12d 30 5d 68 5d 150d 311d  QX  SX 32 6d 15d 34d 75d 155d  SX 48 4 10d 22d 50d 103d  SX 96 2 5d 11d 25d 51d                               Data Export   Removable compact flash and USB flash storage device provides multiple data storage  alternatives  Data is stored in a secure binary encrypted format  with the recorder   s configurations  pro   viding added security of the data files     Removable Compact flash and  USB flash storage devices    CE 2     su CD q gt           28 43 TV 25 30 Iss 2 GLO June 06 UK    Functions and Features    External USB Devices    e The recorder has two USB host ports  one front and one at the rear  for attaching external  USB devices such as a keyboard  mouse or a USB data storage key  The keyboard and  mouse can be used to navigate the recorder   s screen along with text entry     Remote Viewer      This is a firmware option that extends the user interface of the recorder onto the desktop  PC  Providing remote viewing of the unit launched from a web
46.  System  Be sure to enable these options or they will not be available  See    Firm   ware Credit System    on page 129     Notes     e    if  elseif  amp  else are followed by expressions in    curly brackets            e lines within the curly brackets always end in semicolon e g       every expression within curly brackets             must include a    return         Small values  fractions  entered into a maths expression will require a zero before the deci   mal point  Eg  0 5    e Outputs that are set to Single Pulse should not be used as a part of a maths expression as  it can cause spurious values     e No white spaces    e Syntax is not case sensitive    NOTICE    Full Maths and Scripting functions are Options and must be enable using the Credit    System  Be sure to enable these options in the recorder or they will not be available   See    Firmware Credit System    on page 129        All of the following tables display functions available in Full and Scripting Maths unless  otherwise stated     43 TV 25 30 Iss 2 GLO June 06 UK 183    Full Maths  amp  Script Processing    Maths Variable and Function Tables    Table 14 1   Maths Variable Table                         Maths Variables Syntax Description  Analogue Input  Eng values    An Get the value of Analogue n  1 to 48  in Engi   neering units  Analogue Raw  Electrical RAn Get the value of Raw Analogue n  1 to 48  in  values  Electrical values  Pen Pn Get the value of Pen n  1 to 96   Digitals Dn Get the value of D
47.  Table VI in the Model Selection Guide     Re packing    NOTICE    Should the original packing be destroyed or lost  new packaging can be ordered or as a  last alternative  then ONLY pack the recorder in polystyrene granules if the recorder is  FIRST sealed in a strong plastic bag  Failure to do this will invalidate your warranty        Environment and Location    e The recorder is designed to be mounted into a panel  See    Installation Instruc   tions    on page 9       Mount in a suitable location where the ideal viewing angle will not exceed 65   from  the left or right  65   looking down and 40   looking up at the recorder display        The location should be free from vibration     e The environment should be of non condensing humidity     The ambient temperature should be between 0  C and 50  C        The relative humidity should be between 10  to 90      43 TV 25 30 Iss 2 GLO June 06 UK 5    Mechanical Installation    Mechanical Installation    Mounting and Viewing Angles    Both the Minitrend QX and Multitrend SX recorders have an unlimited mounting angle  For  the best view of the display the viewing angle should not exceed 65   from the left or right  65   look   ing down and 40   looking up at the recorder display     Panel cut out size for the Minitrend QX recorder    138 00      5 43        Panel Panel  138 00  1    EI a       gt  7 00   gt 6 00  0 28    0 237     Panel  Cut out Please note the recommended  spacing for adjacent mounting    Figure 2 1 Minitrend 
48.  The first time user is reinstated if the password system is reset  No  password is required for first time login  No password is required for first time login     4  From the Main menu press the following buttons   Configure  gt  Passwords  gt  User Admin  gt  Add User  Select    Blank User    and type in your new administrator user name    e Default User name minimum length is 4 characters   Allows the use of alpha  symbol  and numeric characters  no spaces     e Default User name maximum length is 20 characters    5  In the Add User menu your new user name will be displayed  select this  default Opera   tor  and change the User Level to    Administrator     Select Finish and Commit     6  A box will appear when you have successfully added a user  press OK  7  The recorder will return to the process screen     You have now added an Administrator User Level to the password system  You must now  give the new user a password    Administrator Password    1  From the process screen press the Menu button in the top left of the ayy  screen and select the Log In icon in the top right as shown here  Pa    106 43 TV 25 30 Iss 2 GLO June 06 UK    2     box will appear and you will be prompted for your Administrator user name  which  you have just created in items 1 to 7 listed above     3  The Password dialog box will appear  The recorder enters a default password when a  user is added so select    Yes    to change it     e Default Password minimum length is 6 characters  requires a m
49.  Toggle Between Automatic number formatting and User Defined        After Decimal   Only available when User Defined is selected  Select and enter the  number of decimal places   up to 15 decimal places     When the setup is complete go back to the Pen   menu and complete the pen setup     Sterilisation       Specification for Sterilisation  The definition Fo Po is the sterilisation pasteurisation time in  minutes required to destroy a stated number of organisms with a known z at temperature T   For example   F18 250  represents the time in minutes required to destroy a stated number  of organisms at a temperature of 250F  121 11C  with a z   18 degrees F  F values are used  to compare the sterilizing values of different processes  however  F values cannot be com   pared unless the z values are the same  When temperature is not specified  for example  F    8 6  it is understood that the temperature is 250F  121 11C   the subscript O  as in the  term Fo   7 4  is used to indicate that the z   18 degrees F and the temperature is 250F   121 11C     Displaying Totals  Totals can be displayed by setting up a separate pen to display the totalised value  Totals    are best displayed in a DPM screen  If you use a separate pen to display a total be aware  that if the total is stopped the pause symbol will not appear as it does for a totaliser pen     First  select a pen you are going to use to display the total of another pen  Extra pens are  available as a Firmware option see    Cred
50.  USB standard PLC printer   Currently only available on the Status screens   Batch 3 The Batch function allows the user to segment portions of data for further analysis  Batch controls  include Start  Stop  Pause  for viewing  Resume and Abort    Groups 2 Groups of Pens can be specified and named with a Group name or number    Remote Viewer  3 Extends the user interface of the recorder onto the desktop PC  Providing full remote control of   Remote Control Tool the recorder launched from a web browser    OPC Server 8 OPC  OLE for Process Control    Software application for realtime interfacing between servers  and clients  OPC is a software standard that defines common interfaces for data exchange  between devices such as recorders  controllers  PLC   s and Windows    based applications   Extra Pens  4  2 4 extra pens to store and display totalised values  results of calculations  etc  Maximum is up to  16 extra pens for the QX recorder and 48 extra pens for the SX recorder                 Notes      Basic maths is standard in all recorders  Basic Maths math comprises of  Add  Subtract  Multiply and Divide   1  Additional pens     Extra Pens     can be used to display and store the results of calculations  totalisers  variables imported via communications     or to store values      2  Custom Screens must be built using X Series Screen Designer   lay   Screens from V5 Screen Designer cannot be imported   lyt      43 TV 25 30 Iss 2 GLO June 06 UK 129    130    Firmware Credit S
51.  a a eee ea 18  Transmitter Power Supply Card    ss 19  Alarm Relay Cards  amp  Digital Input Output Cards    ss 20  Communications CONNECTIONS      ccceeccesecesesseceseceseceeeeneesseeseesseeeneesseceneceaeseaeenaeseaeens 23  USB Devices      Section 3  OVErVIOW wissidensinnsseetsceccimeansdantacestucsanvicndecesanedewsaduoacssnansewcssendaannuniwanse 25   Functions and Features           cccscssscsssssscssscsscssscssvsescssssescsssscesessssssesencssossonsoess 25   Recorder Functionality sisccsccccscccccecccssenacseavacetsetsctestiancsntensiaasnssvasn csntsatanssesscateaveceeses 27  Features noose  Options   Hardware  nr men lee tbat E EE EE   Section 4  Recorder Setup           sssnnssnennnunerennnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn nnmnnn nnna 35   POWET UD    ssiscescsvassesesessssvacesosusseasesessasdecesescossousseedensosesesdens  usnsadosnsesetenscasensesad 35   T  Menu ACCESS aip BON a a cometh A es A dre AE 35  2  Log OMO eaae e R EE N A e R NE 36  De Local Settini S ee a eai EEA AET E A E AE E 36  4  Time  and Date Settings risorte di a E A ee ME E 37   Firmware OpDhOnS  e e a E E E TOEA E ARTE A N de te 37  Men  t Pathss  teinte A EAE ea AE eaa e a E EAE eA NEAR 37       43 TV 25 30 Iss 2 GLO June 06 UK       SEUD MENU RES RE Ed et eee ne dog 40  ONOU  S RS Ne nn ane 78  Passwords        80  CUI GS ie carcass RE te ewes Legis Daas bee E E A A tt se nue he 63  Alarms M  NU  LEA sn RS see ina a den Re etre etre dl ee Me datant oo 85  Sereen Mende ln ne ei ne ee le i
52.  between Auto  or User Defined     Major Divs   Only available when Divs Select is set to User Defined  Select  and enter the major division position     Minor Divs   Only available when Divs Select is set to User Defined  Select  and enter the minor division position     Start Decade   Only available when the Scale Type is set to Log  Select  and enter the start value of the first decade     43 TV 25 30 Iss 2 GLO June          i  d    06 UK      No  Decades   Only available when the Scale Type is set to Log  Select  and enter the number of decades required  Max 99 decades     e Numb Format   Displays the Notation of the number format  Scientific or  Normal     e  Notation   Toggle between Scientific or    ifi Pen 2 Pen 2  Normal number format  The scientific 26 670  gt  7e 01  fomat displays the value to the power of 10 C7 36  shown here  Notice the value has been    rounded up   Normal Scientific    e  Auto   Toggle Between Automatic number  formatting and User Defined     e  After Decimal   Only available when User Defined is selected  Select and  enter the number of decimal places   up to 15 decimal places     When this pen setup is complete go back to the Pen   menu and complete the pen setup  for all other pens     Logging Menu   Main Menu  gt  Configure  gt  Setup  gt  Edit Setup gt  Pens  gt  Logging     Menu path to current menu    Enabled lv          Edit Setup Logging        Enabled      Type Fuzzy    Type Continuous      Rate Units   Seconds   Rate Units   Minutes
53.  browser software  Full  remote control is available as an option  This function is password protected to prevent  unauthorized access  Compatible with Microsoft    Internet explorer 6 and higher     Security       Total Data Integrity   data is stored in secure encrypted files making it easy to retrieve the  data dependent on process information  Data is automatically recognised without having to  remember file names       Password Protection   Up to 4 levels of password protection with up to 50 different users  are available  Multiple levels of password protection and an audit trail of actions enhance  the security of the data       Extended Security System  option    ESS provides features including entry of unique  User ID   s and associated passwords  time out of password entry  password expiration  and  traceability of user actions  ESS is compatible with the requirements of 21CFR part 11     Events    Events is a firmware option that can be activated using the credit system  Events are certain  conditions or operations which can be set up and logged according to the time and date of  the occurrence  Subsequently events can be reviewed in a list or represented on a graph   An Event is made up from a Cause and an Effect  For example  set up a cause such as Pen  1 going into an alarm state and the effect of this could be to start a totaliser or acknowledge  the alarm     Batch    The Batch function allows the user to segment portions of data for further analysis  Batch  en
54.  by first selecting a process screen that is displaying a  chart  Go to the Messages List button on the Main Menu bar and select Mark  A text box will  appear  enter the message you wish to be displayed as a mark on chart on the screen using  the on screen keyboard or a USB keyboard     43 TV 25 30 Iss 2 GLO June 06 UK    Screen Markers    Table 6 2     Screen Markers     on page 127 shows different types of markers that may    appear on the screen during normal data activity and where they would appear     The markers change depending on if the signal goes High or Low  outside the Pen Scale   or outside the Input Range     Note  a chart should not be used alone without one of the other markers to indicate over   range and under range conditions     Table 6 2   Screen Markers                                           43 TV 25 30    Pointer  DPM Bar  horizontal Chart  chart   Upscale Burnout           Outside Range High             A 4 Trace at Max  Input Range Top o   ee ee     1234 567 A    Trace at Max  Pen Scala Top  2    2 en ee ee ee L  Bar  Trace  Displays as normal 1234 567 Valid  T ee Data  Pen Scale Bottom                                                                                   1234 567    y Trace at Min  Input Range Bottom                         i                                     Ee  Outside Range Low y y y       y Trace at Min  Down scale Burnout    y y  Invalid Reading   k k   k k Trace at Min                         Iss 2 GLO June 06 UK    127    128
55.  configured     Log Off   Once the user has logged on  the option in the Main Menu  wY jai will turn to Log Off  once selected the user is logged off and returned  to the current process screen     User Log in Log Out Method    Users can log in and out of the system or web page easily using the touch screen or an at   tached keyboard     Users and Groups    Number of Users    The system will support up to 50 users     Multiple Log On   s   Users are allowed to log on to the system more then once  allowing the same user to log on  from different areas  e g  via the user interface and via web browser at the same time   User Name    Each user must have a user name  this is a maximum of 20 characters in length and cannot  be duplicated  Numeric characters and symbols can be used in the user name  but no spac   es     User Group    Each user can be allocated to a group  these are defined as follows    Administrator    Administrator has access to everything  and it is possible to have more than one user at the  administrator level  The Administrator will have unlimited access to the system and provide  the ability to setup other users     With the exception of Administrator who has access to everything  the other 4 groups per   missions can be configured  users can then be allocated to a level and they will inherit those  permissions     43 TV 25 30 Iss 2 GLO June 06 UK 105    Permissions    Permissions may also be customised for an individual user  their permissions can be  change
56.  database servers  Figure 8 5 on page 146  shows the comms status  screen  in the left window from the top is displayed Database Server  Local and remote da   tabase and devices held on the Local database     Connected databases are displayed with a green icon  If the database is in red it is not con   nected  check the  P Address and Device ID are correct and a protocol has been selected  on the device  Un tick and then tick the active box on the comms server to restart the data   base connection     This section looks at the Comms Server   s main elements displayed in the Status Screen   Database Servers  Local and Remote Servers  Databases  Communication Ports  Data   base logging and Client connections    43 TV 25 30 Iss 2 GLO June 06 UK    Communications Server    Remote database servers can be added to the list to enable access to devices held in other  databases on a remote database server in another location  To connect to a remote data   base server the IP address must be known of the PC where the databases server is held    Items with a         sign signifies there are items listed within  Click on the         sign to activate   expand     e Listed under the Database Servers are a list of Servers   e Listed under each Server are the Databases     e Listed under each Database are the devices    EL This is the Database Server icon     Hi This is the Database icon    The bottom window has three actions  Client connections  Database logging and Diag   nostics  When a de
57.  e Failed password attempts   e Areas where access was attempted but denied   e Password expiry   e Inactivity timeouts auto logouts    e Temporary User entry    43 TV 25 30 Iss 2 GLO June 06 UK    Level Permissions    Table 5 1   Default Level Permissions       Default user levels of access to areas within the recorder menu system                                                                                                          car No Login  Permission Area Admin   Engineer   Supervisor Technician   Operator realli d  Perm Area 1 Messages V4 V4 V4 V4 V4 V4  Perm Area 2 Screen V4 V4 V4 V4 V4 V4  Perm Area 3 Status v V4 V4 V4 V4 V4  Perm Area 4 View Totals V4 V4 V4 V4 V4 V4  Perm Area 5 View Alarms V4 V4 V4 V4 V4 V4  Perm Area 6 View Max  V4 V4 V4 V4 V4 V4  Min  Perm Area 8 Acknowl  V4 v V4 V4 V4  edge Alarms  Perm Area 9 Configure V4 V4 V4 V4 V4  Alarms  Perm Area 10   Batch V4 vA V4 v V4  Control  Perm Area 11   Recording V4 V4 V V4 V4  Perm Area 12   Change V4 V4 V4 V4 V4  Password  Perm Area 13   Main Con  V4 V4 V4 V4 V4  figue Menu  Perm Area 15   Configure V4 V4 V4 V4  Totals  Perm Area 16   Configure V4 V4 V4 V  Max Min  Perm Area 17   Load Save V4 V4 vA V4  Setups  Perm Area 18   Main Setup V4 V4 V4 V4  Menu  Perm Area 19   Edit Setup V4 V4 V4  Perm Area 20   General V4 V4 V4  Setup Menu  Perm Area 21   Printer Setup V4 V4 V4  Perm Area 22   Batch Setup V4 V4 V4  43 TV 25 30 Iss 2 GLO June 06 UK 109    Table 5 1   Default Level Permissions       Default user leve
58.  in the    Printer Menu    on page 75  For details on suitable printer types see    Print Sup   port    on page 24     System     Main Menu  gt  Status  gt  System     The System status menu is divided into three more sub sections  General  Options and IO  Cards  Each one will display the current status of the recorder for each category     43 TV 25 30 Iss 2 GLO June 06 UK    General     Main Menu  gt  Status  gt  System  gt  General     Displays the version status for the different types of firmware  hardware and current recorder                         information   Table 4 6   System Version Status   Options Version  ID 0001  Name QX  Serial No  RES  Processor     MHz  Firmware ta       Firmware Data    16 33 33 May 11 2006       Bridge Firmware    kK       Platform    5          Boot Loader    A       Mac address    00 d0 6e                IP Address    160 221               Front USB       Host Mode             Go Back to return to the previous screen or select Print to print the screen     Options     Main Menu  gt  Status  gt  System  gt  Options     Displays a list of firmware options available and which ones are enabled   For more information see See    Section 7  Firmware Options    on page 129                         Table 4 7    Options Credits Enabled  Full Math 4 or  Scripting    Full Maths    6 Yor  Events 6 Yor  Fast Scan 5 VY or  Totals 4 Yor                   43 TV 25 30 Iss 2 GLO June 06 UK    97    98    Table 4 7                                          O
59.  manual Export Now is in progress during the time when a Scheduled export is to occur   the scheduled export will hold off until the manual export is finished     Device Selection  If the Device Selection buttons are greyed out you will need to insert a Compact Flash or  USB key into the port  After a few seconds the button becomes active     USB1 is the first USB fitted and USB2 is the second one fitted  front or rear of the recorder     Export    busy    light  When data is about to be exported to a device the transfer busy light starts flashing  The  flashing LED is a warning that the recorder is about to export to media  DO NOT remove the  media whilst the LED is flashing  After a few seconds the flashing LED goes to    Full On     LED  Whilst the LED is fully on data is being written to the media  DO NOT remove the media  whilst the LED is on  When the transfer is complete  the LED goes off and the media may  now be removed     43 TV 25 30 Iss 2 GLO June 06 UK 91    Messages Menu     Main Menu  gt  Messages     The messages screen will display a selection of message areas  Specific types of messages  have been put into categories or all messages can be viewed  The number of new messag   es to view are displayed on each button as a number in brackets after the label     LE      Finish       Message Types    e All   Select this to view a list of All types of messages  The messages  screen will hold the latest 200 messages        Alarms   This is a list of active alarms tha
60.  mode  The Replay screen con   sists of a chart and DPMs  For standard screens the replay chart is vertical or horizontal de   pending on the orientation of the screen you are currently in  The replay screen has DPMs  that display max min readings for each pen  these values are taken from where the cursor  is positioned on the screen     Note  You can do replay on Bar  Charts and Digital Panel Meter screens and this will jump  into a trend replay screen with the DPM s showing the Min Max values     When using Custom Screens you can only replay 8 Pens on the QX and 12 on the SX re   corder even though you can have more pens than this on the custom Screen     43 TV 25 30 Iss 2 GLO June 06 UK 123    The Replay toolbar will appear at the bottom of the screen     39 00 10 40 00 0 41 00 10 42 00  Jan 06 10 Jan 06 10 Jan 06    10 40 35    10 Jan 06   48 40         gt  AA    Rev Fwd In Out Cursor Exit          e Mode   This function will be svailable soon   e Rev   This is for reverse and is used to scroll back through previous data  e Fwd   This is to scroll forwards on the chart       In  Zoom In on the chart being displayed  Place the chart cursor at the point you wish to  zoom in to  Zooming In will magnify the chart to show greater detail around the cursor posi   tion       Out     Zoom Out on the chart being displayed  Place the cursor at the point you wish to  zoom out from  Zooming Out will decrease the chart to show a larger time span around the  cursor position     e Cursor
61.  number to edit the  setup of each alarm    When an alarm has been configured an Alarm Marker or Pen Pointer will appear for each  alarm depending on the type of process screen  See    Alarm Markers    on page 125    e Enabled   Select Enable to see a list of ways to enable or disable the  alarm  Disable  Enabled Always or Dig Enabled     e Enabled by Digital   Only available when Enabled is set to Dig Enabled   Select and choose which digital signal s  will enable this alarm  on this pen  only      e Type   Select this to display a list of different types of Alarms  High  Low   Deviation  Set a High alarm to activate when the signal goes above the  Alarm Level  or set a Low alarm to activate when the signal goes below the  Alarm Level  Deviation is the how far this pen can deviate from the Ref Pen  before triggering an alarm  See Deviation Level     e Level   Select and enter a figure at which the alarm is to be triggered   e Deviation Level   Only available when Alarm Type is set to Deviation   Select and use the numeric keypad to enter the amount of deviation  in    engineering units  to a designated pen  Ref Pen  before an alarm is trig   gered     43 TV 25 30 Iss 2 GLO June 06 UK 55    56    Ref Pen   Only available when the alarm Type is set to Deviation  Select  and enter the pen that this alarm is referenced to  This works like an actual  pen that dynamically tracks a designated pen     Tag   Enter a tag or name to identify this alarm  Up to 17 characters     Allow Ch
62.  option that can be activated using the credit system  refer to the  Options item in    Credits    on page 70     Not all printers will be compatible with the print support feature on the recorder  The guide   lines are they must be a USB printer that shows as a standard PCL  printer control lan   guage   The system will not support multi function devices or printers that require specific  drivers  Avoid photo printers and printers that allow stand alone operation with cameras or  media specific printers such as pictbridge     There isn   t a constant factor to which printers work and those that wont  We recommend that  you follow the guidelines outlined here and plug it in and see     Examples of printers that are compatible with the system are     e HP Deskjet 995C e HP Photosmart 7760    HP Laserjet 1022n e HP Laserjet 1300  e HP Deskjet 970Cxi e HP Deskjet 450cbi    To set up your printer configuration go to    Printer Menu    on page 75     Keyboards    All keyboards are native USB keyboards  Local keyboard layouts are not supported  all key   boards are recognised as US layout  QWERTY      Cordless keyboards and mice are not supported         Dell Model   SK 8115 Keyboard e IBM ACC42 with USB hubs   e Dell Model   C BG17 Dual Cordless e IBM SK 8815 with USB hubs  Keyboard and Mouse Combination   e Logitech Model   LX300 Cordless e IBM SK 8806 with USB hubs    Keyboard and Mouse Combination    Barcode Reader    Most USB barcode readers emulate keyboards and cause no reco
63.  power is off  and open contacts when there is no active  alarm  The contacts will close when an associated alarm goes active  With  Failsafe On  normally open relays have closed contacts when the recorder  is powered on and there are no open active alarms  and the contacts open  with an alarm active or when the power is removed  See    Failsafe Relay  Positions    on page 172     e Label   Select and enter an identification label  Up to 16 characters       Active Label    Input and Output only   This is the label that is shown when  an alarm becomes active  Select and enter a label  Not available for Pulse  Input  Up to 12 characters     e Inactive Label    Input and Output only   This is the label that is shown  when an alarm becomes inactive  Select and enter a label  Not available for  Pulse Input  Up to 12 characters     e Report   This will acknowledge the Alarm Digital IO to a selected destina   tion  Select User message to add the Digital IO occurance to the messages  list only  Select Mark On Chart to display the occurance on a chart and to  the messages list     When the configuration is complete select the Finish button to Commit  Discard or Commit  Later  Select the Back button to return to the previous menu     Pulse Input   Main Menu  gt  Configure  gt  Setup  gt  Edit Setup gt  Field IO  gt  Pulse Input     Only available when a Pulse Input card is fitted as an option  The Pulse Input card operates  up to a frequency of 25kHz max  See    Pulse Input Channel Num
64.  recorder is acting as  the Server  the Client recorders must have the recorder   s name as the  Server Name  up to 32 characters   See    Ident    on page 69 for the  recorder   s name     e Period   Only available when Client Enable is active  Select and enter the  time period in seconds required between checking and updating the time  using the on screen keyboard  This will default to 120 seconds     e Threshold   Only available when Client Enable is active  This is a specified  amount of time  in seconds  that the recorder clock must be within to  ensure synchronisation with the network server  Eg  if set to 3600 the  recorder time must be within 1 hour of the network server to ensure time  sync will take place     43 TV 25 30 Iss 2 GLO June 06 UK 63    64    Figure 4 4 Client Server network       Client Server Network    Figure 4 4 on page 64 shows a Network Server at the top  a recorder acting as both a  server and a client in the middle and a string of client recorders at the bottom  A recorder  can be set up to be a server and a client  Setting it as both means this recorder will synchro   nise time with the network server  But will also allow other recorders to time sync with it  This    saves many recorders trying to time sync with the network server     When the configuration is complete select the Finish button to Commit  Discard or Commit    Later  Select the Back button to return to the previous menu     TCP IP   Main Menu  gt  Configure  gt  Setup  gt  Edit Set
65.  select this button the    Delete Data  Warning     box will appear with a message     This will delete ALL log and chart data  taking 80 sec     onds to complete and will restart during the process     80 seconds is an approximate time depend   ing on the size of the internal memory  Select OK to proceed  This is an irreversible procedure     Batch Menu   Configure  gt  Setup  gt  Edit Setup gt  General  gt  Batch    Batch is a firmware option which can be activated from    Credits    on page 70     The Batch function allows the user to segment portions of data for further analysis  Setting  up a batch requires information to identify and control batches of data  Batch data can also  be paused  for viewing  and resumed  A batch can be aborted at any time  if so this will not  register as a batch  a batch is only complete when it has been stopped     In this menu the user can stipulate which items are required when setting up a new batch   A marker will appear for each item activated on this menu and will be placed on a chart  For  more details on batch Markers  refer to    Batch Setup Batch Control    on page 87     User ID Reg         Description         Comment R             Lot Required          Allow Direct      x      CSC    Toggle the batch menu options On or Off           User ID Required   Tick to make this a requirement when starting a new batch  If Pass   words are active on the recorder then the User ID page will be skipped for user entry and  will be automaticall
66.  stored on a retrieval system or transmitted in any form without the prior permission  from Honeywell International Inc     Trademarks    e Microsoft  MS DOS  Windows  Windows 2000  Windows XP and Windows CE are  all registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation     43 TV 25 30 Iss 2 GLO June 06 UK 1    Safety    Safety      Compact Flash   and CF  logo  are trademarks of the Compact Flash Association   CFA        For the purpose of this manual the     and    symbols will not follow their own trade   mark names or registered trademark names in every instance       Company names and Product names mentioned in this manual are trademarks or  registered trademarks of their individual owners     The X Series range of instruments is compliant with the requirements of BS EN 61010   1 2001    Safety Requirements for Electrical Equipment for Measurement  Control and Labo   ratory Use    and UL 61010C 1 and CSA 22 2 1010 1  as options  If the equipment is used in  a manner not specified  the protection provided by the equipment may be impaired     The X Series range of instruments is compliant to the requirements for Class 1  Div 2 Haz   ardous  Classified  Locations     Symbols    One or more of the following symbols may appear on the recorder labelling     Table 1 2   Safety Symbols       Symbol Meaning          Caution   refer to manual for  instructions       Caution   risk of electric  shock       Direct Current       Protective conductor terminal       Earth  ground  terminal   
67.  the timer   return tget 1   Return the current  paused  timer value        Note in this script above there is no way to reset the timer  this could be modified to allow  the user to reset this timer from a switch fed into a digital input as follows     if D1  1  Tests if the DI 1 is not set    If it isn   t then  if  GLBV1  1  Tests if the global variable 1 is equal to channel 1     BLKV1 trun 1  0   If it is then keep the timer running without resetting  return tget 1   Return the current timer value     else    If not then    BLKV1 tpause 1      return tget 1   Pause the timer     Return the current  paused  timer value     else If it is     BLKV1 treset 1   reset the timer 1 to zero  return tget 1   return the current  zeroed  timer value       194 43 TV 25 30 Iss 2 GLO June 06 UK    Full Maths  amp  Script Processing    Example 4    Commenting in Scripts  This is an example of how commenting can be used in scripts   you can use the standard C   commenting  inline comments use       for example    f A1 gt 10        return 9      f A1 greater then 10 return 9         or for block  single or multiline commenting the    to open and    to close  these are C style  comments and work as follows    if  A1  gt  10        return 9     f A1 greater then 10 return 9            for single line or  if A1  gt  10        if A1 is greater then 10 then return 9   which is completely useless but   goes to show a multiline comment for pascal     return 9          these are also useful for c
68.  transferred from the recorder to a PC  or transfer between other devices and peripherals     e Slave ID   This is a unique Modbus ID Address used by the recorder to  identify Modbus messages  Applications that talk to the recorder with Mod   bus will need to know this number to return messages to the device  If you  are using the Communication Server of Trend Server Pro the same  number must match     e Baud Rate    Only available when the RS485 port in selected   Select this  for a list of available Baud Rates  This is the speed  in bps  bits per sec   ond   at which data is transferred     e Byte Options    Only available when the RS485 port is selected   Select  this button for a list of available Byte Options  The Byte Options consist of 3  digits comprising of Parity  set to None N  Even E or Odd O   8 Data Bits  and Stop Bits  signifying the end of the character string  1 or 2        Line Turn Around   Only available when the RS485 port in selected   This  is for a 2 wire line type  Data has to be fully transmitted before the line can  be turned around and data can be received  or vice versa     e Reply Delay   Enter a delay time  in milli seconds  before the recorder  sends a reply  Recommended delay should be set to 12mS  min   if using  the Comms Server      Modbus X   Modbus X protocol differs from standard Modbus by the 4 floating point order  that is reversed for application compatibility     When the configuration is complete select the Finish button to Commit  
69.  up this link    The TCP IP properties are displayed showing the PC   s IP address and the Subnet mask   Make a note of the IP Address and the Subnet mask  If there is no IP address or Subnet  mask displayed  contact your IT systems administrator     When this information is entered  the next stage is to configure the device   See    TCP IP    on page 64        43 TV 25 30 Iss 2 GLO June 06 UK 137    138    Comms and Trend Manager Pro Suite    Figure 8 1 Ethernet hub switch                                                          Switch hub Z                                        Uplink  optional  to    Mains  other networks                      Mains       Local Area Network setup    This is a group of computers and or associated devices e g Honeywell devices  that share  a common communications line and typically share the resources of a single processor or  server within a local geographical area  e g  within an office      43 TV 25 30 Iss 2 GLO June 06 UK    Comms and Trend Manager Pro Suite                                        Realtime data Figure 8 2  from the device  to the Comms  Server   Comms Database  Server Lg p gt  Server  Software Software  y   Disk data  shown  ___1indotted  is      D    Realtime data from imported from the  the Comms Server to a device to the  the TrendServer ee Database server  TrendServer    Links to Remote Networks    Communications is not just limited to local networks  Devices and databases on remote net   works can be accessed using t
70.  up to 16 out   puts for the Minitrend QX and 48 outputs for the Multitrend SX        Analogue Output   2 or 4 outputs available per card for the Minitrend QX with 2  4  6 or  8 outputs available for the Multitrend SX recorder  Output type  0 20mA or 4 20mA     e Nema 4X   IP66   Nema 4X   IP66 protection available as an option   e Portable Recorders   Portable cases available as an accessory item     e Digital Input   a number of digital input options are available  The digital inputs allow users  to initiate  from a remote location through a dry contact closure  selected recorder functions     e Pulse Frequency   four frequency inputs per board  are available to measure pulse signals  up to 25 kHz  max  2 cards      e Approvals   CSA  UL and FM CL1 Div 2 approvals     24VAC DC or 48VDC Power Supply   20 to 55VDC   20 to 30VAC     e 24VDC Transmitter Power Supply   Minitrend QX can supply up to 200mA to external  transmitters  up to 4 loops  not DC version   Multitrend SX up to 1A  not DC version         Print Support   Enables the printer option to print from various screens using a basic USB  standard PCL  Printer Control Language  printer     43 TV 25 30 Iss 2 GLO June 06 UK    Functions and Features    Multitrend SX Standard Screens    The Multitrend SX recorder has up to 30 screens displaying multiple combinations of charts  bars  and DPMs can be configured  4 examples below        51 67    36 46   70 28       16 Digital Panel Meters  showing Max Min values and  Totals 
71.  users  password re entry lock out for incorrect entry of password more than 3 times  no re use of  passwords  programmable 4 to 12 times   traceability by user name       Totaliser Sterilisation    optional     One totaliser per input  Totaliser value must be assigned to a pen for display and storage  Multiple  totalisations  Maths option  are possible with the use of extra pens  option   Reset may be manual or  programmed  Totalisation values are ten digits plus exponent    Each pen can be totalised according to the Fo or Po sterilisation  function at 250   F  121 11   C   The  Standard Reference Temperature and Thermal Resistance  Z Value  are fully adjustable values of X   Y  W and V  Start temp  Reference temp and Z factor are all user defined  allowing support for many  different types of sterilisation applications        Events    Events is a firmware option that can be activated using the credit system  Events are certain condi   tions or operations which can be set up and logged according to the time and date of the occurrence        Batch    The Batch function allows the user to segment portions of data for further analysis  Batch enhances  the management of data collected in non continuous process  known as batch processing        Print Support    Enables the printer option to print from various Status screens using a basic USB standard PLC  printer        Math Algorithms  optional     All analog input channels have a math expression block  This is a fully user pro
72.  which  input is the highest     o_o    The greater than     gt     is used  the AND     amp  amp     Boolean is also used  and the global variable  GLBV1 is used to hold the current highest channel number     Converting this to an actual script gives the following     If   A1 gt A2  amp  amp  A1 gt A3  amp  amp  A1 gt A4   This tests if flow meter 1 is more than 2  3 and 4      GLBV1 1  If yes  then set display indicator to meter 1  return A1  And return the current flow reading         elseif   A2 gt A1  amp  amp  A2 gt A3  amp  amp  A2 gt A4   This tests if flow meter 2 is more than 1  3 and 4       GLBV1 2  If yes  then set display indicator to meter 2  return A2  And return the current flow reading         elseif   A8 gt A1  amp  amp  A3 gt A2  amp  amp  A3 gt A4   This tests if flow meter 3 is more than 1  2 and 4       GLBV1 3  If yes  then set display indicator to meter 3    43 TV 25 30 Iss 2 GLO June 06 UK 191    192    Full Maths  amp  Script Processing    return A3  And return the current flow reading       else If none of the above are true  then 4 is biggest      GLBV1 4  So set display indicator to meter 4   return A4  And return the current flow reading         In this application  the flow meters are connected to inputs 1  2  3 and 4 at the rear of the  recorder  and these are recorded on Pens 1 to 4    P1 A1   P2 A2   P3 A3   P4 A4   Pen 5 has the script above  which records and displays the highest flow rate of the four   Pen 6 is set to record and display t
73.  will appear as an icon in the system task bar in the bottom right of the  PC screen     43 TV 25 30 Iss 2 GLO June 06 UK 143    144    Communications Server    The Communications Server appears as an icon in the Windows    system   bar at the bottom right of the screen  Double click or right click to open  loads   automatically with TrendServer  The comms server manages the commu    nications status of devices on a serial port  RS485  or through an Ethernet   connection  Only Modbus protocol is available for X Series devices  see     Modbus    on page 134     Devices are held on databases and the databases are held on servers  By accessing other  comms servers remotely it is possible to receive data from other devices held on databases  on other servers   known as remote servers  Figure 8 3 on page 140     The comms server uses IP Addresses to locate devices on local and remote servers  All  Logging configuration for comms logging and logging to a database is set up from the Com   ms Server     The Comms Status shows all the activity of devices  Communications ports  Databases and  Database Servers  The window to the left displays the areas controlled by the comms serv   er  the database servers and the communications ports  The display area s  to the right will  display details of any item selected in the left window  Depending on what has been selected  the right window will split in two to give logging information  Items listed in the left window  that have a   sign again
74. 0V dc are deemed to be     Hazardous Live           Failure to comply with these instructions could result in death or serious injury              43 TV 25 30 Iss 2 GLO June 06 UK    Section 2  Installation    Damage checks    Any damage caused to the recorder or the contents should be reported immediately to your  shipper     Unpacking    Remove the contents  check the packaging and remove all documentation and accessories  supplied  Retain the box and any packaging for future transportation     Contents    Check that the contents and accessories are correct against the order or Model Selection  Guide using the model number on the recorder  Contact your authorised Honeywell distrib   utor or Honeywell immediately should there be any query     The contents are based on Unit Model Number ordered and will vary from unit to unit  The  following list is provided as a general guide and not specific to any single unit     e Recorder   specification as ordered  check against the Model Selection Guide     Mounting fixings   Mounting clamps and panel gasket      Connector kit   mating half connectors to recorder spec  Including a CJC connector for  Thermocouple operation     Quick Start Guide   to get you started  First time Password system instructions   for ESS recorders only    e    e      CD   Viewer software   documentation    e    Plastic stylus x 2  for use with the touch screen     Manual  optional    Hardcopy English  French or German     Any other items ordered as an option 
75. 16 I O cards are labelled from left to right  1 to 16 on the  left side and 17 to 32 on the right  Each channel can be set up as an input or an output  For    output the relay is normally open type   A Form A dry contacts relay is used for this type of card  The inputs are designed to accept     Dry contact  no volt inputs        NOTICE    For Digital Inputs  short together the 2 pins of the channels with a switch or a relay        Figure 2 9 Digital Input Output card connector details    CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 CH5 CH6 CH7 CH8 CH9 CH10 CH11 CH12 CH13 CH14 CH15 CH16    3 a s el7 elo 10 11 1243 14 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30                NOC NOC NOC NOC NOC NOC NOC NOC NOC NOC NOC NOC NOC NOC NOC NOC    NO   Normally Open  C   Common    22 43 TV 25 30 Iss 2 GLO June 06 UK    Digital Input Card Channel Numbers    Electrical Installation    The Digital input cards are either 8 or 16 channels with a full length connector taking up 16  channels even if only 8 channels are in operation  Both the digital input cards can be used  as a relay card if required                       Table 2 6    Digital Input card 8 channel Digital Input card 16  channel  Card Channel Card Channel   position number position number  Slot G 1to8 Slot G 1 to 16  Slot H 17 to 24 Slot H 17 to 32  Slot   33 to 40 Slot   33 to 48                         Communications Connections    RS485    The RS485 port uses a 3 way connection  After connec   tion  select the RS485 port from the Comms menu and  select the 
76. 2     10V     10V    Single Point Sensor Compensation is  used to offset the signal input by a user  specified amount over the full range        Sensor Compensation    Low Eng   only active when Full Range is not active  Set the Low limit for the Engineering    units     Low Offset   enter an offset value that is offset against the Low Eng value     High Eng   only active when Full Range is not active  Set the High limit for the Engineering    units     High Offset   enter an offset value that is offset against the High Eng value     Figure App H 21 Sensor Compensation    Solid line shows without compensation  and dotted line shows with compensation    J  10V        10V          High Offset of  5    100 High Eng       0 Low Eng    Dual Point Sensor Compensation is used to  offset the signal input by a user specified  amount against the Low and High Eng val     ues  The offset amount can vary throughout  the signal input range     43 TV 25 30 Iss 2 GLO June 06 UK    Appendix l  Battery Data    Location  Processor Board       Type 6032   IEC CR2032   System Li MnO   org elyt   Voltage 3 0 V                                                                Cell Type Typical Capacity Weight   mAh   6032 230 mAh 3 gms  Approx Percent   age     of total  weight  Active Materials   Maganese dioxide  mnOz  29  Propylen carbonate  PC  4 3  1 2 Dimethoxiethan  DME  2 1  Lithium metal  Li  2  Carbon  C  0 9  Lithium perchlorate  LiCIO  0 3  Passive Materials   Stainless steel 57 6  Plastic
77. 2Gb  USB hard drive   up to 120Gb   Internal Data Buffer  Non volatile  7OMB  16 million acquisition values  upwards to 1850MB  up to  400 million points    Setup and screens  Stored internally on non volatile memory   Manual Saving  Data saving by inserting compact flash card or USB memory stick   Data Saving Period  Related to log rate  number of pens  totals and alarms  Each pen is capable  of its own independent storage rate   20ms to 60h     Data Format  Honeywell binary encoded format   Recycling Mode  Internal memory has FIFO  First In First Out  capability where the newest data  over writes the oldest data                 43 TV 25 30 Iss 2 GLO June 06 UK 173    Specification Tables       Specification    Design Attributes          Power Requirements    QX Recorder   Voltage  VRMS   100VAC to 250VAC  auto select   Frequency  50 60Hz   Power Consumption   lt 40W    Optional instrument power Voltage  20 to 55VDC 20 to 30VAC  Power Consumption   lt  40 watts  SX Recorder   Voltage  VRMS   100VAC to 250VAC  auto select   Frequency  50 60Hz   Power Consumption   lt 60W    Optional instrument power Voltage  20 to 55VDC 20 to 30VAC  Power Consumption   lt  60 watts       Common Relay Output  SPNC     NC common alarm relay  Two contacts  normally open when the recorder is powered  no active  alarms   Rating 24V  1 Amp        Battery    Battery backed up for clock  Lithium battery     10 years life  Recorder powered    4 years life  typical  Recorder unpowered         Password 
78. 300V AC   at Measurement Category CAT II  Overvoltage Category II     Failure to comply with these instructions could result in death or serious injury        43 TV 25 30 Iss 2 GLO June 06 UK    Electrical Installation    NOTICE    For 12 and 16 way connectors  torque setting 0 4 Nm 3 5lb in  Do not over tighten   Recommended wire size for termination connector is 22 12 AWG  22 14 SWG        4 and 8 Alarm Relay Cards    The 24 way connector for the Alarm Relay Card  connects to 3 A  240 VAC SPCO relays   The pin outs for 4 and 8 relay Alarm Relay cards are numbered from left to right and they  read as follows for each channel  NC  normally closed   C  common   NO  normally open    Devices driven by the relays are connected via two 12 way screw terminal plugs     The last two channels  7 amp 8  23 amp 24 or 39  amp  40  can be used as digital inputs  connect across  Common  C  and Normally Open  NO      CAUTION    IMPROPER MAINS SWITCHING    For 8 channel Alarm Relay cards    Switching mains on the normally open contact on channels 7 and 8 is not recommended   as surges and spikes on the mains supply could cause damage to the input circuitry   The normally closed contact is unaffected  and can be used like all the other channels        A Form C dry contact relay is used for this type of card  The inputs are designed to accept     Dry contact  no volt inputs     The relays should be used for non inductive loads only     Where a device requires a voltage to operate it  such as a
79. 5 5    Display  23   50001782 501   QX SX Speaker  25  50016276 501   QX Vutronik Adaptor Assy Not shown  24   51453071 501   QX Case and Back Plate Assy  27   51453077 501   QX Inverter and Cable Assy  28   50006787 501   QX  SX Battery  Kit of 5           43 TV 25 30 Iss 2 GLO June 06 UK    159    160    Table 10 1         Minitrend QX   Spares                                                 29   50001011 502   Compact Flash card 64Mb Not shown  50001011 503   Compact Flash card 128Mb  50001011 504   Compact Flash card 256Mb  50001011 505   Compact Flash card 512Mb  50001011 506   Compact Flash card 1GB   43   51453071 502   QX Case  Handle and Terminal Cover   Not shown   44   50005224 501   QX Rear Terminal Cover Not shown   45   50017150 501   QX Left  amp  Right Hand Chassis kit   48   30755050 502   QX Mounting Hardware kit  2 Mounting   Not shown   Brackets    49   51453083 501   QX Panel Gasket   52   51453038 501   Stylus Kit Black  pack of 5    53   50013947 501   Connector kit  2 of each connector Not shown   type    54   50017179 501   QX 5 5    Backlight kit of 2 Not shown  50017290 501   Touch Screen Protector  kit of 5  Not shown  50017181 501   QX SX Blanking Plate for I O Slots  2    Not shown  51452129 501   10 Ohm Resistors Pack of 8 Not shown  50001251 501   QX Portable Case Not shown                43 TV 25 30 Iss 2 GLO June 06 UK       Multitrend SX Recorder    Go   a1 2565              43 TV 25 30 Iss 2 GLO June 06 UK 161       RS485 USB Ethernet  host
80. 6                      Functions use radians  27 radians   360 degrees     Damping examples   Example 1  if P1 was measuring degrees C the expression P1   damp A1  P1  3  will damp  the signal with changes up to 3 degrees C  any change over 3 degrees between readings  will be damped but by a small amount   Example 2  P5   damp A2  P5  A3  will damp the A2 input up to a level determined by input  A3  note the reference parameter  P5  is always the same as the pen it is being used in   this should always be the case                    Table 14 3    Compare  amp  Convert Syntax Description  F2c f2c x  Converts a temperature in F to one in C  C2f c2f x  Converts a temperature in C to one in F   RHc rhe x y  Returns   Relative Humidity with y as the dry bulb    temperature in degrees C  and x the wet bulb tem   perature in degrees C        RHf rhf x y  Returns   Relative Humidity with y as the dry bulb  temperature in degrees F  and x the wet bulb tem   perature in degrees F                   Hi hi x y  Returns the larger value of x  amp  y       43 TV 25 30 Iss 2 GLO June 06 UK    Full Maths  amp  Script Processing                                                                   Table 14 3    Compare  amp  Convert Syntax Description  Lo lo x  y  Returns the lower value of x  amp  y  Hi4 hi4 x y x1 y1  Returns the larger value of x  y  x1 y1  Lo4 lo4 x y x1 y1  Returns the lower value of x  y  x1  y1  Over over x y  Returns x if it   s larger than y  otherwise returns 0  Under un
81. 6  Screen Configuration    on page 119 for information on  setting up screens to display the data     User Interface Control    All user actions can be performed via the touch screen using the stylus  All on screen selec   tion and navigation areas are large enough so the unit can be operated without falsely se   lecting an adjacent option using the stylus provided     The stylus is to be used to operate the touch screen  It has a rounded end to avoid damage  to the screen  Only a light touch is required to activate the screen  Two styluses are provided  and there is a special slot at the top of the recorder to slide the stylus in from the right     Other User Interface Control    All user actions can be performed using a mouse or keyboard attached to the front or back  USB host port     1  Menu Access    When the recorder is powered up the display will show a splash screen followed by an ini   tialisation screen displaying the default language flag     The first screen to appear on the recorder is a default process screen with the menu bar at  the top  Select the Menu button to access the menu system to configure the recorder  The  Menu button takes you to the Main Menu     From the Main Menu you may be required to Log In  if the Password function is active  see     2  Log On Off    on page 36     The next configuration required is to set the recorder to the correct local settings  see    3   Local Settings    on page 36     Figure 4 1 Default process screen    Access to   a
82. AL LUI Invalid User Id   P2 Alm 1   Into Alarm 4057   P2 Alm 2   Out of alarm S091   P2 Alm 2   Into Alarm S091   P2 Alm 1   Out of alarm 4056           The messages screen will hold the latest 200 messages     Message button bar    The message button bar runs along the bottom of all messages screens  The button are     e Back   Takes you back to the main Messages screen     e Jump   Select an item in the message list and press the Jump button  This  will take you to the exact time of the occurrence on the replay screen   See    Replay    on page 123  If the message requested is older that the  oldest chart time data available a message box will appear and jump you to  the oldest chart time and date available     43 TV 25 30 Iss 2 GLO June 06 UK    93    94    Message Format    Table 4 5   Message Types                         Icon Type Description   Alarm Red Bell   in Alarm and not acknowledged  Alarm Green Bell   out of alarm   Green Bell   Black outline   out of alarm and  Alarm   acknowledged   Alarm Green Yellow bell   out Alarm not acknowledged  Alarm Red Green bell   in Alarm and acknowledged       System Diagnostics    Information  General  eg  System check        System Diagnostics    Warning    eg  media error  FTP failure  Timouts        System Diagnostics    Error   eg  Password failure  power failure  no media                          E Vi e 0 P P O  gt  Ep  gt   gt  p p             Security Security audit trail  Security Log In   open paddlock  Security Log Out
83. Back button to return to the previous menu     Credits   Configure  gt  Setup  gt  Edit Setup gt  General  gt  Factory  gt  Credits     70 43 TV 25 30 Iss 2 GLO June 06 UK    The Credit menu contains the Serial No  of the recorder  how may credits are available  dis   plays the Options Code and lists what Firmware Options are currently active       Serial No    read only and cannot be edited     e Credits   read only and cannot be edited  It displays the number of Credits available to  activate additional firmware functionality       Options Code   The Options code is a unique coded number for this recorder that contains  information that enables certain functionality including the total credit value       Options   This displays how many credits are currently in use  Select this to produce a list  of Firmware options available and their credit values  Toggle each option On or Off to ena   ble the feature within the recorder  If there are not enough credits available  More credits  are available from your supplier  For a complete lists of all the firmware options and their  functionality see Table 7 1     Firmware Options     on page 129    FW Upgrade   Configure  gt  Setup  gt  Edit Setup gt  General  gt  Factory  gt  FW Upgrade  The Firmware Upgrade button allows new versions of the recorder firmware to be loaded  into the recorder via a USB key or a Compact Flash card  The file type required to upgrade    the Firmware has the file extension  xsu  Firmware can be upgraded f
84. C printer  For details on  suitable printer types see    Print Support    on page 24       Allow Printing   Tick to enable On and Off    Groups   Configure  gt  Setup  gt  Edit Setup gt  General  gt  Groups     In the pens menu individual pens can be added into a group  These groups of pens can then  be displayed on the recorder  The same pen can only be associated in one group  This  menu is used for re naming the groups     43 TV 25 30 Iss 2 GLO June 06 UK 75    Screen Menu    Screen Setup   Main Menu  gt  Configure  gt  Setup  gt  Edit Setup gt  Screen   Set up the recorder   s screen configuration      3 Screen Setup          Charts    Brightness     lt       Finish         Screen Saver   In this menu you can configure the Screen Saver functions  See    Screen  Saver    on page 76      Charts   In this menu you can set the Fast  Medium and Slow chart speeds  See     Charts    on page 77      Brightness   Adjust the brightness of the screen using the instant brightness slider  See     Brightness    on page 77    Screen Saver     Main Menu  gt  Configure  gt  Setup  gt  Edit Setup gt  Screen  gt  Screen Saver     Configure the screen display and Screen Saver functions  The default state for the Screen  Saver is disabled  The Screen Saver function helps to reduce backlight wear  When active   the back light is off and nothing on the display is visible  The screen saver will not function  in Setup Menus or in test mode        Enabled   Toggle On and Off    e Timeout   Only av
85. Discard or Commit  Later  Select the Back button to return to the previous menu     43 TV 25 30 Iss 2 GLO June 06 UK    Web   Main Menu  gt  Configure  gt  Setup  gt  Edit Setup  gt  Comms  gt  Web     The Web browse function is enabled disabled from the recorder  Select this to enable and  allow the recorder to be browsed on a web page  Internet access is required  The Web but   ton is password protected if passwords are enabled  For web browsing information see     Web Browser    on page 142 and    Internet Security Settings    on page 142        Level Permissions    on page 109 for information on permission levels to the Web Brows   er and access within the web page for Full Remote Control     SNTP   Main Menu  gt  Configure  gt  Setup  gt  Edit Setup  gt  Comms  gt  SNTP     Simple Network Time Protocols is a protocol for synchronising the clock on the recorder with  a Network Server        Server Enable   Toggle On and Off  Activate this to make this recorder the  server  Other recorders  set up as clients  can synchronise their time to this  server recorder     e Client Enable   Toggle On and Off  Activate this to set this recorder to syn   chronise time with the server  See Figure 4 4 on page 64     e Server Name   Only available when Client Enable is active  This is the  name of the Network Server that can be used for time synchronisation   Enter the server name to be used for time synchronisation  this could be a  Time Server on the internet or on your network   If a
86. EEEE R E EAEE E ES 203  Appendix F  Fuzzy Logging sssmssaniineanssnneceseaanneesentistutenneandente 205  Appendix G  F sub zero Sterilisation               cseeeccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 209  Th   significance of FOR NRA ti nl te eee at 209  Appendix H  Calibration ennemies ie eentansiviteenenns 211  AI Calibration and CJC Calibration    eesesesesesoeesoesosesocoesesesososseoseosececossesecesoe 211  Sensor Compensation  sssssssssssssssrsisssssssssissossseso  sossssssrososvososssodesro  ovdsssvs  s sose 211  Appendix l  Battery Data ii ssssnnnsrrrrrrssssnnnnneenenennnne  Location  Processor Board  Safety Guidelines  ist Mennnaeaentintinss intended ht 213  Appendix J  Function Codes and Memory Maps      nnnssssnnnsnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn  Modbus Memory Map Supplement  _              Totalisers  ennemis ones  Input Text message      sccseccsseseessceeseeseeeseeeee  Analogue Input Value     Communications Input    sisi  Pen Values nn cen e a a tn mnt S 216  Modbus Function Codes sms 216  1    0 25 E PAR RER ARE A A A 217    vi 43 TV 25 30 Iss 2 GLO June 06 UK    Section 1  Preface    Preface    Thank you for choosing a Honeywell X Series recorder    Thank you for purchasing the newest in our range of electronic data recording for Honey   well X Series Advanced Graphic Recorders    The Minitrend QX and Multitrend SX paperless chart recorders are the latest develop   ment of the solid state replacement for traditional paper recorders     Many options  features and 
87. Export  required in 18h 12 minutes    siz Schedule  Export Now Scheduled       Storage Media Format    New Compact Flash cards and USB storage keys are pre formatted for use in the recorder  and PC  If you have a used compact flash or USB key we recommend you erase it  Format   ting of Compact Flash cards and USB keys can be done through your PC  The formatting  types accepted by the recorder are FAT  FAT16  2GB limit   TFAT and FAT32     Recording  The top line displays the current pen recording status and the current number  of pens recording    The Recording screen will allow the user to manually Start and Stop recording  Select either  the start or stop buttons to activate the function for All pens  a Group of pens  if a group is  defined  or By Pen to identify an individual pen s      Export     Export  required in XXh XX minutes    is the Memory Usage Information    This is the amount of days  hours and minutes left until the internal memory buffer starts to  be overwritten  Exporting does not remove the data from the recorder but when the internal  memory buffer is full the latest data will start to over write the oldest data     Data can be exported to a Compact Flash card or a USB key  There are two USB ports  one  under the front flap and one at the rear of the recorder  The Compact Flash slot is under the  front flap  The export screen shows two USB buttons  USB1 is the first device to be plugged  in and USB2 is the second device to be plugged in  If a power failur
88. Fig   ure 2 3 on page 13    Signal Wiring    A WARNING    ENSURE SAFETY EARTH CONNECTION    Always ensure the unit is connected to safety earth when connecting to an AC or DC  supply   Failure to comply with these instructions could result in death or serious injury        The Honeywell recorder is intended for panel mount use  and only the front face is intend   ed to be exposed to the operator  Disconnection from the supply MUST be made possible  by means of a switch  circuit breaker or other means of supply isolation  The disconnection  device must be included in the panel installation  clearly marked  in close proximity to the  Honeywell equipment  and within easy reach of the operator  The protective earth termi   nal must remain connected  even if the recorder is isolated from the mains supply  if any  of the analogue or relay terminals are connected to hazardous voltage     43 TV 25 30 Iss 2 GLO June 06 UK    Electrical Installation       WARNING    HAZARDOUS VOLTAGES    When using the recorder as portable equipment the optional rear cover must be fitted  when hazardous voltages are connected     Failure to comply with these instructions could result in death or serious injury        AC Power    AC supply is connected via the standard configuration IEC chassis plug on the rear panel   100   250 Vac  50 60 Hz  40 VA Minitrend QX  60VA Multitrend SX    Absolute limits 90V 132Vac and 180V 264Vac    24V DC Power   24V AC Power    Supply range is 24V DC     10   absolute li
89. GLBV1 A1   GLBV1 becomes the value of  A1     Equal to LL Returns a true or false result from testing if two  variables are equal to each other  e g  IF   A1  GLBV1    Not equal to l  Returns a true or false result from testing if two  variables are not equal to each other  e g  IF   A1  GLBV1    AND  amp  amp  Returns a true or false result from testing if two  tests are both true  e g  IF  A1  GLBV1   amp  amp    A2  GLBV2    OR Il Returns a true or false result from testing if one  or other or both tests are true  e g  IF   A1  GLBV1      A2  GLBV2    XOR   Returns a true or false result from testing if one  or other  but not both  tests are true  e g  IF   A1  GLBV1     A2  GLBV2    NOT   Returns true if the result is 0  otherwise returns  false    Greater than  gt  Returns a true or false result from testing if one  variable is greater than another   Greater than or equal to  gt   Returns a true or false result from testing if one  variable is greater or equal to than another   Less than  lt  Returns a true or false result from testing if one  variable is less than another   Less than and equal to  lt   Returns a true or false result from testing if one          variable is less than or equal to another       43 TV 25 30 Iss 2 GLO June 06 UK       Full Maths  amp  Script Processing    Table 14 7         Functions for Scripts Syntax Description          If if x  Carries out a conditional test and if true steps  into brackets to run  If false  steps to next test  without o
90. General   Supervisor access  Screen   Supervisor access    Edit Setup          Event 1 Event 1          a  Event 2 Event 2          Event 3 Event 3          Event 4 Event 4          Events Event 5          x    x ll       x Pe    lt   YIYIT Y       Event 6    4 Back B p    Event 6                   ja Finish   a       Events menu   Supervisor  Access  All of the Events    menu buttons require Super   visor access    Permission Area 27     43 TV 25 30 Iss 2 GLO June 06 UK          Pens Menu      Supervisor Access      Permission Area 26        Setup                                                 Pens 1   Pen 1  0 00 to 100 00  D gt       Pens 2 Pen 2  50 00 to 500 00  B gt     Pens 3 v Pen 3  10E9 to 10E22  p gt     Pens 4 v Pen 4  10E1 to 1066   p gt     Pens 5 y Pen 5  0 00   5000 00  p gt     Pens 6 Pen 6  20 00   200 00  p gt       Ba Copy To   4 Back   By  Finish ld                                       Edit Setup   Field 10 Pens Comms       a p  Events General Screen  Finish  hs General a  EAEN   Ident Localisation CA   batan bain lala   Batch Printer Groups       Back Finish    General menu   Supervisor  Access  See Figure 5 9  for General menu access    Permission Area 20                   Comms Menu   Engineering  Access  See Figure 5 10 for  Comms access  All of the  Comms menu buttons require  Engineering access    Permission Area 29      S  Comms    2    ES EE IP       Le          LA Screen Setup a              S                Screen Sayer Charts    ew EI    Scre
91. Honeywell Minitrend QX  amp  Multitrend SX Recorders       See  Store and Send Data Securely    For the best in data acquisition  data security  and peace of mind     choose Honeywell       43 TV 25 30 Iss 2 GLO June 06 UK    Table of Contents          Section 1  Pr  face sus rence ce wiceid dad ceweuubvewtireusw deans wwuswieenwiwe 1  Preface E T NT O TAT 1  Thank you for choosing a Honeywell X Series recorder    1  Supplementary documentation sise 1  NOLES ere re r ee a a a Re ate e ta tete  Trademarks      DALCLY     Hoteles EEEO OEA EENE tte eee ne TA  SVINDOISS RAT seats  main ches  nn sey enc eel umn tate an RTE lente Mn mr fun tee Le 2  Static Electricien a eaa A MR A ees a ne ee a ea 3  Protocols used in this manual             ccssscscssscssssssvsssssssesensssesssssesscsesssssssseesseees 3  Safety and Symbol Identification    ss 3  Warnings and Safety Precautions     esseeesseseesesoesecoeseeoeseeeoeoesoeoesoeooeseeoeseeoeseeeeee 3  DO S  And DONS nee a ead ea keane re te Re eut 3  Hazardous Voltage  dis eiee r a n a enr ssns Wat rester EE dent dant ve 4  Section 2  Installation disesciicnsesidcavennrannnnsndeasseeusivwns duadsuoudianduenadsannidtansuncinvenasnaniun 5  Environment and Location     esesseseesesoeeesoeoceoeeossecoeseeoeseeeoroeeoeeesoeoorseeoeseeoeseeeeee 5    Mechanical Installation       Electrical Installation  Installation Category          Analogue Input Card  Analogue Output Card  orane a E E a ANR SAR ER ne 17  Pulse Input Cards ss aient etes he
92. How many times the recorder has had the power turned on    43 TV 25 30 Iss 2 GLO June 06 UK 99    e Last Power up   The last time the recorder had been turned on     _Inetrnal Mem Id   This number is made up from the size of the memory card and what type  of format it is  Eg 128116   128MB size formatted to TFAT16    e Time On since power up   The amount of time since the recorder was last turned on     Total On time   How much time the recorder has had the power turned on     Total Off time   How much time the recorder has had the power turned off      Longest Off time   How long was the longest time period the recorder was powered off   e Lithium cell life   Approximately how much battery time is left   e Backlight Life   Approximately how many hours of Back light time left     Compact flash   How many times the Compact flash card has been inserted     Lowest temperature   Displays the lowest ambient recorder temperature detected so far    Highest temperature   Displays the highest ambient recorder temperature detected so far      Al last factory cal     When the last factory calibration was made to this Analogue Input  card  Eg  in card slot A      Al last user cal       When the last user calibration was made to this Analogue Input card   Eg in slot position A  input 1  All channels will be listed per channel     Al last user cal 4 3 Fri Oct OF 13 50 24 5132     AI last user cal 4 4 Fri Oct OF 13 50 24 5132     Al last user cal 4 5 Fri Oct 07 13 50 24 5132     Al last use
93. In 25 to 32  Pulse Input 25 to 28  Slot E 8 Analogue In 33 to 40  Pulse Input 33 to 36  4 Analogue Out 33 to 36  Slot F 8 Analogue In 41 to 48  Pulse Input 41 to 44  4 Analogue Out 41 to 44  Slot G 4 Relay Output 1 to 4  8 Relay 2 Digital In 1to 8  8 Digital Input Output 1to 8  16 Digital Input Output 1 to 16  Slot H 4 Relay Output 17 to 20  8 Relay 2 Digital In 17 to 24  8 Digital Input Output 17 to 24  16 Digital Input Output 17 to 32  Slot   4 Relay Output 33 to 36  8 Relay 2 Digital In 33 to 40  8 Digital Input Output 33 to 40  16 Digital Input Output 33 to 48                43    Analogue In Menu   Main Menu  gt  Configure  gt  Setup  gt  Edit Setup gt  Field IO  gt  Analogue In     Press the Analogue In button to display all the analogue inputs available     Click on individual Analogue In number to set up each channel profile  Each channel has a  list of menu items to be configured     Refer to connection details and    Analogue Input Channel Numbers    on page 15     Edit Setup Field 1 0 Analog In Menu path to current menu  Analog In 9    A9  Volts    1243      gt       Analog In 10    10  Amps  0 20m     2Hz Ds    The Analogue In screen   Analogin11   w    A11  Ohms  1K   2Hz p   ae Fae o   Analog In 12    A12  TC  Type K   2Hz Fr Each channel displays its     AnalogIni3      A13  RT  PT100   10Hz  gt    individual settings        Select a numbered channel   AnalogIni4      Al4  Volts   504   5Hz   gt  in to edit the configuration of   eat P each input               
94. In the event of a recorder failure contact your nearest Service Department  or an author   ised agent  to arrange for the return of the unit for repair     Cleaning Instructions    Backlights    The recorder    s touch screen can be temporarily disabled for cleaning  see    Clean Screen     on page 86     Cleaning the unit should be done with a soft lint cloth and warm soapy water or screen  cleaner recommended for use on a PC  Solvents and prolonged exposure to detergents  can cause damage to the front panel  It is recommended that any cloth used for cleaning  is damp but NOT wet  to avoid water collecting in the unit     For Nema 4X  IP66 rated units refer to the Nema 4X standards     1  At room temperature and full brightness the backlight MTTF is 55 000 hrs     1  MTTF is defined as the time at which 50  of a batch of backlights remain in excess of  half their original brightness i e  a display has a greater than 50  chance of being half  its original brightness after 55 000 hrs for the QX and 43 000 hrs for the SX when used  at 100   Maximum luminosity 400 cd m2  Reducing the brightness can signifi   cantly improve the life of the backlight     2  At extended temperatures these times are reduced   3  The backlight is a consumable item  and will NOT last forever     4  A maintenance schedule of exchanging backlights should be every 5 years to maintain  the optimal disk clarity     Operating Temperature    Operating temperatures are described in    Specification Tables    
95. Installation    123456789 10 111213141516 17 18 19 20                                   a   aaa           gq ag 00000000 G  aOdaaodgadada  da  ell      x      lESESEOEOEoEoEoEoEooooooooooEESAY    24V LED OV       Figure 2 7 Transmitter Power Supply card for the SX recorder    Alarm Relay Cards  amp  Digital Input Output Cards    The Alarm Relay Cards and the Digital Input Output Cards are both options available for  the Minitrend QX and the Multitrend SX recorders     All Alarm Relay card inputs provide 240V AC isolation channel to channel and channel to  recorder  Digital Input Outputs will provide isolation to 100V AC test voltage  not for mains  connection      All digital inputs have volt free contacts  and are sampled at 10Hz max     The Minitrend QX has only one slot available for digital inputs and relay outputs for either  a 4 or 8 channel Alarm Relay card or an 8 or 16 channel Digital I O card fitted in slot G  the  position is identified on the rear panel    The Multitrend SX can have up to three Alarm Relay cards fitted in any combination of  Alarm Relay card or Digital I O cards  The first Alarm Relay card or Digital I O card is fitted  in slot G  any additional cards will locate in positions H and I     A WARNING    HAZARDOUS VOLTAGES  Digital Input Output card channels must not be connected to any hazardous live volt   ages  no higher than 30V AC rms or 60V DC      Alarm Relay Card channels  Alarm Relay Card channels can be connected to hazardous voltages up to 
96. LEDs are fitted on the Analogue Input card  Analogue Output card  Pulse Input card  4 and  8 Alarm Relay cards and the 8 and 16 Digital IO cards  The LEDs can be seen through six  holes on the left side of the QX recorder  and 18 holes on the SX recorder  looking from the                            front    Table 12 3    Po ee Sequence  Type of Fault   1 1 flash once  pause  flash once  pause etc Hardware  2 2 flash twice  pause  flash twice  pause etc Communications  3 3 flash three times  pause  flash three times  pause etc Memory  4 4 flash four times  pause  flash four times  pause etc Other  1 2 flash once  pause  flash twice more quickly  pause  CJC fault  flash once etc  added as CJC could be unplugged      1 3 If another error is also present with CJC error  flash CJC fault    once  pause  flash 3 times                   Red LED flash codes relate to the first fault stored in the error buffer  With no faults  the red  LED remains off     When the red LED is flashing  the green LED stays lit  The green LED flashes for normal  operation  The board outputs the flash code for about 30 seconds after it was registered     180 43 TV 25 30 Iss 2 GLO June 06 UK    Appendix A  Quality and Safety    CE Mark  Honeywell X Series recorders are compliant with Low Voltage Directive 73 23 EEC as  amended by 93 68 EEC  and the Electromagnetic Capability Directive 89 336 EEC as  amended by 92 31 EEC and 93 68 EEC    Safety    The product range of instruments is compliant with the requir
97. LO June 06 UK 77    Layout     Main Menu  gt  Configure  gt  Layout  gt      The user can configure how the data is presented on the screen  From the Layouts screen  choose to Edit  Save or Load layouts in the recorder     ral        Finish       Edit Layout     Main Menu  gt  Configure  gt  Layout  gt  Edit     This section allows the user to configure and customise the standard screens on the record   er  The Edit button will produce a list of available screens in the recorder  In each screen you  can enable  check and change the screen properties  See    Edit  Screen Properties    on  page 1217     The Edit button may display a warning message if the Commit Later option has been select   ed  This means changes to the configuration have been made but the changes have not  been committed to the recorder  See    Commit Later    on page 104     Select a standard or a new screen to view the following menu list     e Name   Select to Change the name of the Standard Screen  22 characters  max  including spaces     e Enabled   Toggle On and Off to activate this Standard Screen    e Template Type   Select from a list of pre defined templates     ee DPMs   Select which pen is displayed  Activate to display Max Min readings  and or activate to display Total values    ee DPMs and Scales   Select which pen is displayed  Activate to display Max Min  readings and or activate to display Total values    ee Charts and DPMs   Select which pen is displayed     ee Charts and Bars   Select whic
98. O number and the system  channel position  This will show a tick if this channel is enabled  Fixed refers to the common  relay output on the power board  24V relay        Input Output Pulse   Displays what activity is on this channel  Input  Output or Pulse Input        Alarm   Displays the Pen number and the Alarm number that activates the digital output  when the alarm is active  The Alarm has to be set to Relay out     e Status   Displays the current state of the digital input on this channel or pulsed if Pulse Out  is selected  The relay is displayed as open or closed       Duration   Displays the Output Pulse duration set     Go Back to return to the previous screen or select Print to print the screen     Pulse Inputs   Main Menu  gt  Status  gt  Diagnostics  gt  Pulse Inputs     e Channel   Displays the Slot position  eg  A  B  C  D  E or F  the Pulse Input number and the  system channel position  This will show a tick if this channel is enabled        Frequency Count   Displays the input mode  fixed as Frequency  in Hertz        Input   Displays the current Pulse Input reading for this channel  in Hertz     Go Back to return to the previous screen or select Print to print the screen     Comms   Main Menu  gt  Status  gt  Diagnostics  gt  Comms   This screen contains a description of the type of comms currently being used and its status       Description   Displays current Comms information  eg  Ethernet or IP address      Status   Displays the status of the Ethernet eg
99. Protection    Multiple Administrator control of password setup and management with four levels of password  protection for     Engineer  Supervisor  Technician  and Operator  Up to 50 different users are avail   able  Password protection restricts user entry to the recorder set up and specific screens   Engineer     Highest access to all levels  Supervisor  Technician and Operator    Supervisor     2nd highest level including Technician and Operator access   Technician     3rd level including Operator access   Operator     4th and lowest level of access        Languages    English  French  German  Italian  Polish  Portuguese  Brazilian   Slovakian and Turkish        Temperature Units      C  F  K       Recorder Identification    Recorder name  Screen name  Time and Date        Clock    Tolerance   30ppm to a resolution of 1 second at 25  C  See Battery for details   Summer Winter manual or automatic time adjustment or via communications  SNTP Client and or  Server included for synchronising over Ethernet        Alarm Set Points    6 per pen integral    soft    alarm set points easily set by user to announce selected out of limit con   ditions  user can select if an alarm triggers a change in the screen background colour  Alarm trig   gers can be set for Hi  Lo  Deviation  latched or unlatched  for alarm acknowledgement    Alarm Damping     1 sec to 24 Hours  Hysteresis       100  of pen scale   Common relay output  1A 24V  can be activated on any alarm        Data Replay Mode
100. QX Panel cut out    6 43 TV 25 30 Iss 2 GLO June 06 UK    Mechanical Installation    Panel cut out size for the Muititrend SX recorder       281 00  ais 06     a  _     Panel il 281 00  Cut out Wen  11 06       gt 20 00   0 787      Panel  Cut out    Please note the recommended  spacing for adjacent mounting    Figure 2 2 Multitrend SX Panel cut out    The Minitrend QX and Multitrend SX recorders are DIN Standard sizes and should be pan   el mounted     43 TV 25 30 Iss 2 GLO June 06 UK 7    Mechanical Installation    Minitrend QX Dimension details       W000  Due     0040000    0000000  8840000  0008000000000100  mo   00       156 92    144 D1   5 670           4 Mounting clamp positions  For standard units fit only two  brackets on opposite sides of the unit  either top and bottom  or left and right slots  NEMA 4X rated recorders require all four  mounting brackets to be fitted     Figure 2 3 Minitrend QX Recorder dimensions    43 TV 25 30 Iss 2 GLO June 06 UK    Mechanical Installation    Multitrend SX Dimension details    280 00             11 024        000000000000000  o 00000000000000                          200 00 80 00       300 00 47 00    T  11 811  g  1 850                                                    4 Mounting clamp positions  For standard units fit only  two brackets on opposite sides of the unit  either top   and bottom or left and right slots  NEMA 4X rated re   corders require all four mounting brackets to be fitted     Figure 2 4 Multitrend SX recorde
101. S WINS MDNS ooie  IP Address aii  POISS aegen en ue   Technical Data  amp  Specifications       Alarm Digital Input  Analogue Output oe nae  Field LO  sinirinin iacere setae  Input Range Performance Accuracy Table            177  Pulse Input Card issues 169  Specification Tables       173   Temp Umils ae eine 69   Thermocouple Connections  External Reference oo  ccececececeeeceseseseseeeeeeeeeeeees  How Thermocouples work ia  Internal Reference    s es  Thermocouple CJC Compensation   Thermocouple Connections Appendix C  197   Time Settings ne arr einen   Time Zone i   Totaliser    sssrinin a   Displaying Totals o     Sterilis  tion oo    eeesesssssseseseseeeseeeeseseseeeeees   Totals   Start  Stop  Reset   Touch Screen rar nue nan   Trademarks saone 1   Transmitter Power Supply Card ees  19   TrendManager Pro Software  TrendManager Pro  TrendServer Pro oo    Ne  TEMG VIC WER mensae irere N r EEE                    U    USB Comms Ports cicc 61  USB Devices   OVELVIEW  ssihinnninininnininnenihneeneniis 29  USB Key Format nues 90  User Calibration ns 71  User Messages   isi 92  Users  Passwords ns 82    VWXYZ    View Alarms s 85  Warnings and Precautions    s1100 3  MOD AE 63    43 TV 25 30 Iss 2 GLO June 06 UK    223       224 43 TV 25 30 Iss 2 GLO June 06 UK    Sales and Service    For application assistance  current specifications  pricing  or name of the nearest Authorized Distributor  contact one of the offices below     ASIA PACIFIC    Control Products   Asia Pacific Head
102. Select a Web content zone to specify its security settings      gt  il    Settings       amp  0      Qu    Internet Local intranet Trusted sites Restricted   Enable  sites  6  Download signed Activex controls                Internet  4 This zone contains all Web sites you  haven t placed in other zones    Security level for this zone  Move the slider to set the security level for this zone            Medium j  Initialize and script ActiveX controls not marked as safe      Safe browsing and still functional  LOF   Prompts before downloading potentially unsafe content    Unsigned ActiveX controls will not be downloaded TAR    Appropriate for most Internet sites  lt  aT  gt     Disable    Enable x            Reset custom settings    Custom Level    efault Leve Reset to   Medium                         Communications Server    Comms Server Overview    The Comms Server and the Database server will automatically become active when the  TrendServer software is running  Refer to the TrendManager Pro Suite Software Manual   Installation instructions  The Comms server will enable the user to     e Monitor the status of communications with a device on any serial port  up to 8 ports and an  Ethernet connection       Set up local and remote databases     Set up local and remote servers     Modbus protocols supported on Ethernet and Serial ports    Enable and disable ports      Add  edit and remove devices      Log to database or client connections  local or OPC client     The comms server
103. Server that has been added to the database servers list  Connection can be made  by selecting    Database Servers    in the left window and then right clicking in a clear space  in the top window displaying the database servers list     43 TV 25 30 Iss 2 GLO June 06 UK 145    146    Communications Server    Comms Server Status Screen    Figure 8 5 Server  Databases and Devices list    PF communications Server      Administration       Gli Database Servers  ID No    Name   Mode  Status   Channels  active _  1P Address  oO       Local Server None 160 221 36 118  E    Initial Database None oO 160 221 36 119  Junes   6 mini Realtime 160 221 36 67       l   Communication Ports  Hy comi Destination  source Rate Type     com2 Local Server Sample  se COM Local Server Sample  VA COoM4 Local Server Sample  so coms Local Server Sample  ae COME  se  COM   se coms  Ei Ethernet  CP 118  CP 666          Client connections Database lagging    7       Database Servers    The Database Server will list databases and display the devices within each database as  they are added  Click on any of the database servers or the database within and details of  that item is displayed in the main window  The main window will split to give additional infor   mation for databases showing comms port and device details     Devices are added to the comms server through the Communications port  the device can  then be configured for logging  The devices appear in the database and these databases  are held within
104. Setup Menu    Setup menu   Technician access   Permission Area 18                 Edit   Supervisor access  Save   Technician access  Load   Technician access        Save and Load setup buttons  require Technician access    Permission Area 17                   ies 10  2 Pens   Comms    Edit menu   Supervisor access  See Figure 5 5 for Edit Setup  menu access   Permission Area 19              ra Edit Setup a    Events JTE General   Screen       Figure 5 4 Default password access from the Password Menu    Password Menu   Operator access   Permission Area 36               User Admin   Administrator  Change Password   Operator access    z User Administration P   EJA    Policy Levels Add User                      Users Delete User   Unlock User      Change Password button    requires Operator access    Permission Area 12               User Admin   Administrator access  All of the User Administration menu  buttons require Administrator access    43 TV 25 30 Iss 2 GLO June 06 UK    Figure 5 5 Default password access from the Edit Menu    Field 1 0 Menu   Engineering  Access  All of the Field I O  require Engineering    button  access   Permission Area 35        faa Field 1 0 a  Be    BS     amp    lt   gt     Analogue In Analogue Out     Alarm Digital 10                   RA       Pulse Inputs       Back       Edit Setup Menu   Supervisor  access  Permission Area 19     Field I O   Engineering access  Pens   Supervisor access  Comms   Engineering access  Events   Supervisor access  
105. System  Free Form Maths ue  Remote Viewer    sssseeeeeeee oe  Firmware Upgrade o sssescccssvesssccsvisesssssssssssesssee  First Time Password Setup   ESS  Free Form Maths ecco   TO I sic i ee estate ee leita as  Full Maths  amp  Script Processing  Function Codes and Memory Maps             215  mt ou 12  Fuzzy Logging Appendix F           ss 1259 122002   205  G  General Menu    sssri 68  Batch Menu oo    ccececeeeeseseceseseeeeeeeeeeeeeens  lt     14  Factory 10  Groups      ee palo   det sssimnenninnist  n an     69  Localisation occ si      69  Printer Menu oo    ceeeeseteseseeeseeeeeneneeeeeees sela  COURS nement r E 75    43 TV 25 30 Iss 2 GLO June 06 UK    H    Hardware   OPUONS nement 33  Hazardous Voltages haine 4  Help Files rase 37    I    IP Address    aeaii  lden eee OE  Installation inner  24V DC Input oe   Alarm Relay Cards             Analogue Input Card  Analogue Output Card oes 17  Comms Connections  Digital IO Cards         0        Electrical Installation  Environment and Location    s es 5  Instructions woe ccceccccceecscsscsecsessscsessssseseseeseees  Mechanical Installation  Panel cut out size       0 0 0 0    Pulse Input Card              SPCO Relay sense sorties  Transmitter Power Supply Card oo    19  Installation Category sis 12             K    Keyboards auen 24    L    LED Flash Codes ie 180  LANGUE as shcaa livin evisssSkausodebecomsdbeoned RA  Layout Menu  Add Screen            Delete Screen  Edit Layout           Load Layout  Save Layout  Level 
106. T of x  SinH  sinh x  Returns the Hyperbolic SIN of x  CosH  cosh x  Returns the Hyperbolic COSINE of x  TanH  tanh x  Returns the Hyperbolic TANGENT of x  ASin  asin  x  Returns the Arc SIN of x  ACos  acos x  Returns the Arc COS of x  ATan  atan x  Returns the Arc TAN of x  Ceiling ceil x  Round up x to the nearest whole number  Floor floor x  Round down x to the nearest whole number  Round round x  Rounds x to the nearest whole number                43 TV 25 30 Iss 2 GLO June 06 UK    185    Full Maths  amp  Script Processing    Table 14 2   Maths Function Table                            Maths Functions Syntax Description  Floating point Absolute fabs x  Returns the Floating Point Absolute value of x  Exponent exp x  Returns the Exponential of x  Log log x  Returns the Base 10 Log of x  Ln In x  Returns the Natural Log of x  Square Root sart x  Returns the Square Root of x  Power powfx y  Returns the value of x raised to the power y     Can also be represented by                           Power xy Returns the value of x raised to the power y    Modulus X Y Returns the value of x with a modulus of y   Square sq x  Returns the square of x  i e  x multiply by x    Reciprocal recip x  Returns the reciprocal of x  i e  1 x    Root root x y  Returns the y root of x   Eval eval x  Returns 1 if x is non zero  otherwise returns  zero   Damp damp x y Z  x   input  y   Pn  pen variable being used  and    z   damping limit in engineering units  See     Damping examples     on page 18
107. There are 4 options of cold junction compensation  CJC  on the recorder that are  detailed below  The simplest and most common is to use the    Internal Automatic    compen   sation  This uses a CJC sensor built onto the Al board to measure the connector tempera   ture  In this case it will measure 20  C  this will then be added to the 80  C measured by the  thermocouple to give a displayed reading of 100  C     The 4 methods of cold junction compensation are described below   All diagrams show passive burnout  for active burnout replace the   for       43 TV 25 30 Iss 2 GLO June 06 UK 197    Thermocouple CJC Compensation    Thermocouple CJC Compensation    The different methods for connecting thermocouples according to the type of reference are  shown below     Internal Automatic    Input terminals  on rear panel of                                                                   Measuring recorder  junction  D Inputs    Volts   Look up table  Qo added D  converts  i        C D  voltage read   ing to tem   C perature   Thermocouple CJC Reading  aoe in volts  A  gt   Thermocouple  Temperature  Reading   Table edate  in   C maths  expression             Internal Auto  This is connected to the input terminals of the recorder  and the temperature  at this junction is being measured by a temperature sensor on the rear panel of the recorder   The reading from this sensor is read off against a value taken from the thermocouple table   which corresponds to the type of thermocouple 
108. Time  in seconds  of the Demo Input  Select and  use the on screen keyboard         Add Noise   This is to Add Noise to the Demo Input as a percentage value   Select and use the on screen keyboard     When the configuration is complete select the Finish button to Commit  Discard or Commit  Later  Select the Back button to return to the previous menu     Analogue Out Menu   Main Menu  gt  Configure  gt  Setup  gt  Edit Setup gt  Field IO  gt  Analogue Out     Only available when an Analogue Out card is fitted as an option  2 or 4 outputs are available  per card     Refer to connection details and    Analogue Output Channel Numbers    on page 17    Edit Setup Field 1 0 Ana  Out Menu path to current menu    Ana  Out 10   v AO10 PenNo  1  4 20ma Ds  The Analogue Out screen  displays all the available    Ana  Out11     A011  Pen No  1  4 20m    gt   Analogue Output channels     Each channel displays its  Ana  Out 12 4012  Pen No  1  4 20m4 nu       ansowr2   x aitan a individual settings     Select a numbered channel  to edit the configuration of  each output    PS CP    Press the Analogue Out button to display all the analogue outputs available  Click on indi   vidual Analogue Out number to set up each channel profile     e Enabled   Toggle On and Off     43 TV 25 30 Iss 2 GLO June 06 UK       Allow Overrange   Toggle On and Off  Disabled as default  this will allow  the output signal to go overrange to 21mA  if disabled the maximum is  20mA     e Transmit Pen   Eg  Select a pen 
109. a  can be displayed next to each other on a split graph screen  The comms server is used to  configure logging and manage databases and reflect each devices status  See    Commu   nications Server    on page 143     PC Ethernet connections    Device and PC Ethernet connections    Connect an Ethernet cable from  the Ethernet port on the back of  the device to the Ethernet hub   Connect another Ethernet cable  from the Ethernet port on the PC  to the Ethernet hub        Hubs or Switches    Hubs and Switches come in all different shapes and sizes  Both are used as a common   connection point for devices in a network  They are commonly used to connect segments  of a LAN  A hub contains multiple ports and when a packet  Of data  arrives at one port   it is copied to the other ports so that all segments of the LAN can see all packets  Switches  work in a similar way but send the data directly from one port to another  On a busy net   work this can be quicker and can have less data collision incidents     43 TV 25 30 Iss 2 GLO June 06 UK    Ethernet cable  to device       Ethernet cable  to PC       Spare Ethernet  ports for additional  devices    Ethernet Uplink  option to other  networks       DC Power Supply    Getting connected   IP Address    Stand alone system    This is for a local device direct to a PC using an Ethernet crossover cable  By using a  crossover cable  the PC is able to receive data transmitted from the device    Contact your IT systems administrator for setting
110. abled     An Administrator should be nominated to have control of the password system    User Admin    Change Pwds             First Time Login    The first time the system is used a default user name and password is available  the user  name is    Admin    and will have no password  this is known as the    first time    user  Access to  the first time user is removed once the password system has been configured  The first time  user is reinstated if the password system is reset     For recorders with Extended Security System  ESS   see    First Time    Password System  Setup    on page 106   Administrator    This is the top level access to all menus  Only the Administrator has access to the password  setup  The Administrator is responsible for adding users and assigning their levels of access  throughout the recorder menu system  More than one Administrator can be set up     User Administration     Main Menu  gt  Configure  gt  Passwords  gt  User Admin     The Administrator will set up the recorder   s password policies  permission levels of access  in the menu system and will add  delete and unlock users and assign their permissions level     43 TV 25 30 Iss 2 GLO June 06 UK    The recorder will display a default setup that can be customised to suit  This is set out in     Level Permissions    on page 109     Policy   Main Menu  gt  Configure  gt  Passwords  gt  User Admin  gt  Policy     At the top of the Policy menu are four levels to be assigned  these are the permissio
111. ailable when the Screen Saver function is active  This is  how long the Screen Saver will display on the screen  Programmable  between 1 and 720 minutes in software  when disabled the screen will  remain on permanently  enter 0 to disable      e Saver Type   Only available when the Screen Saver function is active  This  is set to Normal     76 43 TV 25 30 Iss 2 GLO June 06 UK    e Dim Saver   Only available when the Screen Saver function is active  Dim  Saver will help to increase the life of the backlight and lower the screen  brightness for night time use  Use Saver Brightness or Off Always     e Saver Level   Only available when the Dim Saver function is set to Use   Saver Brightness  Select this to use the instant dimming slider which lowers  the screen brightness  Default screen brightness is 80   Adjustable  between 10  and 100  of full brightness   This works on a square law rule that means if you reduce the saver level by  25  you will double the backlight life  If you reduce the saver level by 50   you will quadruple the backlight life  Normal backlight MTBF at 100   brightness is 55 000 hours for the QX and 43 000 hours for the SX  recorder     When the configuration is complete select the Finish button to Commit  Discard or Commit  Later  Select the Back button to return to the previous menu     Exit Screen Saver  If the screen saver is active  any of the following will deactivate the screen saver       User touches screen   e Any USB device is plugged in or unplug
112. and will have no password  this is known as the    first time    user  Access to  the first time user is removed once the password system has been configured  The first time  user is reinstated if the password system is reset     For more detailed information see    Section 5  Password Security    on page 105     3  Local Settings    Go from the Main Menu to Configure  gt  Setup  gt  Edit  gt  General  gt  Localisation    All text is displayed in the currently selected language  Help system language can be select   ed independently  currently English only available  To configure local settings  languages   time zones  daylight saving  temperature units and mains frequency for input filtering  see     Localisation    on page 69 section     43 TV 25 30 Iss 2 GLO June 06 UK    Default Time Zone  Go from the Main Menu to Configure  gt  Setup  gt  Edit  gt  General  gt  Localisation  gt  Time Zone    The recorder is set to the default Time Zone for Eastern Time  US  Canada    GMT  5 00    When the configuration is complete select the Finish button to Commit     4  Time and Date Settings    Go from the Main Menu to Configure  gt  Settings  gt  Set Time  Set the Recorder Time and Date settings  see    Set Time    on page 83   When the configuration is complete select the Finish button to Commit     5  Firmware Options    Go from the Main Menu to Configure  gt  Setup  gt  Edit  gt  General  gt  Factory  gt  Credits    Check your recorder has been set up with the correct amount of cre
113. ange   If activated this will allow quick configuration changes to  this alarm level from the Alarms  gt  Configure button on the Main Menu   This does not change the original setup     Relays Out   Select and choose which Relay Output s  is triggered by this  alarm  on this pen only   The Fixed button will use the common relay output  on the power board  24V relay      Latched   A latched alarm will maintain in its active state until the trigger  source has returned to a non alarm state and the alarm has been acknowl   edged  A latched alarm will continue to flash  if an alarm marker or pen  pointer is displayed  until it is acknowledged and in a non alarm state  Nor   mal alarms can also be acknowledged  See    Acknowledging Alarms    on  page 207 A Reflash option is available to keep the alarm flashing whilst in  an alarm state even after it has been acknowledged  See Reflash     Change Log   Toggles On and Off  Select this to change the Log speed  when an alarm occurs  The Log rate changes when alarm is active and  stays at the alarm rate for as long as the alarm is active then returns to the  normal logging rate  Set up the new alarm logging rate in Alarm Rate in     Logging Menu    on page 53     Mark Chart   Toggles On and Off  Selecting On will place a Mark on the  Chart with automated messages when the alarm becomes active  From the  position of the Mark on Chart the chart background colour will change to  show it is in an alarm state     Hysteresis    not available 
114. ant that is being  used  The test box shows both Modbus and Modbus X readings being received to help de   termine which protocol is correct for this device     Click on the OK button and the changes are saved     Delete a Device    Select the Comms port containing the device to be deleted and right click on the device ei   ther in the left or top window  Select Delete Device from the resulting menu  The Delete De   vice Details dialog box will appear showing the details of that particular device  Check this  is the correct device for deletion  then click on the OK button and the device is removed   otherwise the operation can be cancelled     Logging Configuration    This screen configures channels for logging from a device to a database  It can be accessed  in several ways     1  Use the Configure Database Logging icon at the top left of the screen and select Con   figure Logging from the resulting menu     2  Right click on    Communication Ports    in the left window and select Configure Logging  from the resulting menu     3  Right click on the comms port and select Configure Logging from the resulting menu   4  Right click on the device and select Configure Logging from the resulting menu     Any of these will display the Logging Configuration box  If this screen is selected from either  a comms port or a device then the comms port information will already be inserted  If the  screen is selected from the icon or Communications Port heading then the comms port will  need 
115. aracters 64    e ID   This is a unique 4 digit identifier specific to this recorder   When the configuration is complete select the Finish button to Commit  Discard or Commit  Later  Select the Back button to return to the previous menu   Localisation   Main Menu  gt  Configure  gt  Setup  gt  Edit Setup  gt  General  gt  Localisation   Set up the recorder for native language use and global settings including     e Language   Select native language menu prompts from list     e Help Language   Select native language for Help Files  currently English  only available       Time Zone   Select the corresponding time zone from the drop down list     e Daylight Saving   Toggle On or Off to activate daylight saving  if applica   ble  When the time zone is selected and daylight saving is active the  recorder will change the daylight saving hour automatically  The date this  occures depends on the time zone selected  Some time zones do not have  daylight saving  Data being recorded will be affected  either with a 1 hour  gap of data or a 1 hour overlap of data     e Temp Units   Select the Temperature Units that the recorder is set to for    temperature measurement  Pen scale units may need to be changed  accordingly  See Pen Scale     43 TV 25 30 Iss 2 GLO June 06 UK 69    e Line Hz     Toggle between 50Hz or 60Hz  Mains power frequency  Used to  optimise analogue input filtering  Note  The default value is set based on  the model number but can be changed here     When the configurat
116. ardware and software  you want for a particular application     The measurement and control hardware  such as a recorder  provides front line data acqui   sition  AS soon as the hardware device has collected the data it makes it available to soft   ware applications running under Windows  It presents the data according to the OPC  standard  and is thus known as an OPC server  Each OPC server offers data in the same  way  If the software application can understand the OPC format it can therefore access data  from any OPC server device  making individual drivers for each piece of equipment obso   lete     OPC enabled software include spread sheets  databases  virtual instruments and SCADA   supervisory control and data acquisition  interfaces  These applications are known as OPC  client software     Each OPC server can simultaneously provide data for any number of OPC clients  Likewise  multiple clients can at the same moment access any server  a robust method of communi   cation  With OPC  measurement and control systems can share information and co operate  with other installations across factories  offices  laboratories  etc  The same data is therefore  readily available to engineering  maintenance  management   in fact to anyone that requires  up to the minute data on which to base their decisions     OPC allows  plug and play   All OPC devices will connect together and immediately work  with the OPC client software  This has the potential to massively reduce installation a
117. asecvsasesvigvesseticdacciecdeesents  GLOUPS  eera aE E AER e ed  IP Address                    Ident ww  Language              Line HZ ou     Load Menu  Localisation             Logging we   Modbus ne  PONS    nanas  Printer Menu            Pulse Input               SNTP  woe  Save Setup  Scale Menu             a  Screen Saver wiccccccccccccccccsscsscsscsscsscsscssessssssssessssseess  PGP IVP SSSR ln ne   Temp Units  Time Zone  Totaliser occ  a  WG  oraren AEE ESE EEE  Signal Wiring mens    Slave lD RE OT  SOMWATE reee era a    Software Installation  Comms Server          135  Spares List    ccectnasesacdomrinideendvarcumeniie ata  Specification Tables as  Specifications scieniatcucaiiiamioieianGinthines  Static Electricity  Safety nm 3  Status Menu    a  Alarm Digital IO wie ceeceeeseesesseeetecsesseeeeeenneeees 103  Analogue In  Analogue Out  COMMS        eee  Diagnostics             ay  General Status  Arsinoe isien ai Mess  TO Card  22 mn naine dl E  Maintenance            Media wee  Options ow   Pen Overview              Printing Screens  Pulse Inputs                  Recording                System we a  Sterilisation               Storage Media Format  SVUS a EE E E A  Symbols  Safety rando 2  System Menu  G  n  ral Status coaren eD oa  TO Cards  tcdeivecscctscsrccassinanearnacransaustianetands  Options eee  System Messages  System  STATUS  ssssssssesssiiiirsssesessrriirisrsssrsreeeee                           43 TV 25 30 Iss 2 GLO June 06 UK    T    HE NU TR mais  DN
118. assign all the ob   jects to the same pen  Select objects individually to assign different pens to each object with   in the widget       Number  of the Pen  Alarm for Pen or Input Channel     Showing    is what is displayed on the screen  The selections will change depending on what  is selected in Data From    e Showing  For Pen   Current Value  Minimum  Maximum  Average or Total value      Showing  For Alarm for Pen   List of available Alarms     Showing  For Input Channel   Analogue  Digital  Hi Pulse or Low Pulse    Channel Mapping Objects    To select an object activate the Expert button on the Screen menu bar  Objects have blue  grab handles around the edge     Select    Map    from the Screen bar to display the Setup information as described in    Channel  Mapping Setup screen    on page 123     If the object is an Alarm Marker the data will always be from    Alarm for Pen     Select the Pen  number and which alarm number will be showing     Pen Pointers just need to be mapped to a Pen     Parent Pens    This does not apply to charts as charts normally have more than one pen displayed  The  parent channel is the initial channel to be configured on a widget  All objects added to a wid   get  except charts and pen pointers  automatically default to using the parent channel  The  parent itself allows the user to quickly make all of their objects update to use the pen number  indicated by the parent     Replay    The Replay button takes you to the process screen in replay
119. ayout  gt  Save   The Save button will produce a list of destinations to save the layout to   All the screens on the recorder  standard or customised will be saved     The Compact Flash and the front USB device port are found under the front flap on the re   corder  There is another USB port at the rear of the recorder  The first USB device fitted will  be USB1  therefore the second USB device fitted is USB2     Load Layout     Main Menu  gt  Configure  gt  Layout  gt  Load     Layouts can be loaded from Compact Flash or USB key  The Load button will produce a list  of source files to load them from     All screens loaded on from another recorder  via Compact Flash or USB  or Screen Design   er will overwrite the existing screens on the recorder     The Compact Flash and the front USB device port are found under the front flap on the re   corder  There is another USB port at the rear of the recorder  The first USB device fitted will  be USB1  therefore the second USB device fitted is USB2     See    Storage Media Format    on page 90 for formatting information of Compact Flash  cards and USB keys     43 TV 25 30 Iss 2 GLO June 06 UK 79    80    Passwords     Main Menu  gt  Configure  gt  Passwords  gt      The Password system manages the security within the recorder menu system  It allows re   stricted access within the recorder  providing password protection at different levels     If your recorder has ESS  Extended Security System  enabled the password system cannot  be dis
120. being used  The corresponding reading in  volts for the temperature measured by the sensor is then used as a reference for the reading  from the thermocouple     Diagram shows passive burnout  for active burnout replace the   for       198 43 TV 25 30 Iss 2 GLO June 06 UK    Thermocouple CJC Compensation    Ext 0   C Reference                                                                Thermocouple Copper wire  cable  Look up table  1    Volts   converts volt   p  age reading to  K ang  Oat 7 y temperature   Measuring  junction Reference Input  junction held terminals  at0   C on rear Temperature reading  panel of to maths expression  recorder    Ext 0  C Reference  By keeping the reference junction at 0   C then the negative input is act   ing as a 0 Volt reference so the voltage reading from the thermocouple can be passed di   rectly to the tables where the corresponding temperature reading can be found     Diagram shows passive burnout  for active burnout replace the   for       External with a Specified Temperature    Thermocouple Copper wire        oT                                                                             Inputs Look up table   lt  Ls  cl 0 Volts   V D yp added    Volis    converts  f  C D  ww voltage read   Measuring Tai ing to tem   junction Input 7 perature   terminals Reading in volts  Reference on ae   l  junction held panel o Thermocouple emperature     45   C recorder   i Table P reading to    maths  temp expression             External Ref
121. ber if required     e Modbus   communications protocol used for automation applications   Select and enter the desired port number if required     When the setup is complete go back to the TCP IP menu and complete the Comms setup     43 TV 25 30 Iss 2 GLO June 06 UK 65    Events Menu   Main Menu  gt  Configure  gt  Setup  gt  Edit Setup  gt  Events     Events is a firmware option that can be activated using the credit system     Edit Setup Event 1    Enabled         Event 2 Tag   Event 1  Event 3 X Event3 Cause 1      Alarms    Event 4 X Event4 Cause 2   x   Event 5 X Events Effect 1   Alarm Ack   Event 6 X Event 6  gt   y  Effect 2      Totaliser  a                Events are certain conditions or operations which can be set up and logged according to the  time and date of the occurrence  Subsequently events can be reviewed in a list or represent   ed on a graph  An event is made up from a Cause and an Effect  Set up a cause such as  Pen 1 going into an alarm state and the effect of this could be to start a totaliser or acknowl   edge the alarm           Select the first available event eg  Event 1  In the Event 1 menu tick to enable and change  the Event tag if required  Each Event has two Causes and two Effects available  these can  be used in different combinations     NOTICE    Remember that either Cause 1 OR Cause 2 will trigger Effect 1 AND Effect 2   Cause 1 and Effect 1 are not linked  just as Cause 2 and Effect 2 are not linked          An event can have two causes t
122. bers    on page 19     If a Pulse input card is fitted in slot A the first 4 pens will display the maths function of HPULn  in Edit Maths in the Pens menu as default to display the pulse reading  For more information  see    Appendix B  Maths Expressions    on page 183     Pulse Input 1 PIL  Frequency Measure H    Edit Setup Field 1 0   D Pulse Input Menu path to current menu    Pulse Input 2      P12  Frequency Measure Th e Pulse Input et      gt   displays all the available     Pulse Input 3      PIS  Frequency Measure Hz Be   pulse input channels that  can be set up      Pulse Input 4   v    PI  Frequency Measure Hz jB     Each channel displays its    individual settings     Select a numbered channel  to edit the configuration of    each Pulse input   cc     Press the Pulse Input button to display the available pulse inputs        43 TV 25 30 Iss 2 GLO June 06 UK 49    Click on individual Pulse Input number to set up each channel profile      Enabled   Toggle On and Off   e Hertz   Fixed as Frequency Measure  in Hertz       Update Rate   Fixed at 1Hz    e Label   Select and enter an identification label for the pulse input  Select  and enter a label  Up to 16 characters     When the configuration is complete select the Finish button to Commit  Discard or Commit  Later  Select the Back button to return to the previous menu        50 43 TV 25 30 Iss 2 GLO June 06 UK    Pens Menu   Main Menu  gt  Configure  gt  Setup  gt  Edit Setup gt  Pens     Select the Pens button to disp
123. ces plus an OPC interface available as a firmware option     TrendServer software is required to set up and run communications to and from the devic   es to the PC software     To set up Comms in the device go to    Comms Menu    on page 61   For Comms connections see    Communications Connections    on page 23    Standard Communication Interfaces  Rear Ethernet Communication port   The rear of the device is fitted with an Ethernet10 100 port  which supports   e Modbus TCP IP  See    Modbus    on page 134   e OPC Server connectivity to third party software  OPC Server connection can be  enabled by selecting the OPC option in    Credits    on page 70  For more details  on OPC Servers see    OPC Interface   Open Process Control    on    page 140    e Web browser  See    Web Browser    on page 142     Rear RS485 port    e RS 485  2 wire  half duplex  to support Modbus RTU  See    RS485    on  page 23     Front and Rear USB Communication Ports    At the front and rear of the device are fitted two standard USB communication ports     43 TV 25 30 Iss 2 GLO June 06 UK 133    Protocols    134    Protocols    The USB Host ports will provide an interface for   e Data downloads   e Setup uploads   e External keyboard  amp  mouse  e Barcode reader    e Mass storage device  USB key  or Hard drives  250 GB     Protocols are an agreed upon format for transmitting data between two devices  The pro   tocol determines the following     e the type of error checking to be used  e data compressio
124. conductor outside the recorder  or disconnection of  the protective earth terminal is likely to make the recorder dangerous under some fault  conditions  Intentional interruption of the protective conductor is dangerous     Failure to comply with these instructions could result in death or serious injury        43 TV 25 30 Iss 2 GLO June 06 UK          Warnings and Safety Precautions    In order to comply with the requirements of safety standard EN 61010 1 2001  the  recorder should have one of the following as a disconnecting device  located within  easy reach of the operator  and be clearly labelled as the disconnecting safety device     e A switch or circuit breaker which complies with the requirements of IEC 60947 1 and  IEC 60947 3     e A separable coupler which can be disconnected without the use of a tool     e A separable plug  without a locking device  to mate with a socket outlet in  the building     2  Whenever it is likely that protection has been impaired  the recorder should be made  inoperative and secured against operation  The manufacturer s service centre should  be contacted     8  Repair is not to be attempted by a customer  Any adjustment or maintenance expected  of an operator as part of the normal operation of the product is referred to as Opera   tional Maintenance  Any maintenance not expected of the operatoris referred to as  Corrective Maintenance and is to be carried out only by authorized service personnel  or returned to an authorized repair cen
125. creen Markers    nesses  Screen Configuration 0     Menu Bat fameuse  Process Screen Overview          00  Screen Designer Screens    s     Screen Menu Bat sssrin  Screen Designer ramadan  Loading a Layout into a Recorder  Loading a Template into a Recorder       SONWALE ennemies       Screen List ire 86   Screen Markers nine 127   Screen Menu iii 76  86  Charts seiriceisinintriirenen nerens       Screen Saver  Screen Menu Bar  Channel Mapping  Edit kuenen e ERRE  R  play errunonnoansamaneusim  Screen Saver ossessi  Brights crair EEEE a  Dim Saver is i5cccievesaidisvhseievisasds eth dh na iE EEE  Script Function Application Examples      191  Scripts using COMMENTING u    195    Security  Overview dapatan anan aaua ENER EER 29  Security Messages sssi 92  Sensor Compensation  Analogue Input Calibration 0    211  Settings  Time and Date    n se 83  Setup Menu _  AT Calibration   lt   3ccisesscdscdeecsecsecsccuevesteccaeteavsarsssscisvnese  Alarm Relay pcna eano eau h  Alarm Digital IO PA  Alarms Menu seeren  Analogue In Menu Pon  Analogue OUt sererai  Batch Menu wee cccccccsccsccsscsecsscsscsscsssssssscssesseeeees  CJC Calibration oc   Calibration    oeseri  Charts  COMMS  25m  Credits     ccccisecsscessesessessessesecseesoesvesoesens  Daylight Saving oe  Digital IO seinnaa  Edit SCP    cvisccssecicsscesnienssneesiseresseces pe  Events Ment 2  nme                   222     G   100  th e see E EE  Field IO vices  Firmware Upgrade  GONG Hall   exesceecessecsce cet cecseiuvssdhase
126. ctor supporting Modbus TCP  Internet  DHCP or fixed  IP address  RS485Modbus RTU  up to 115200 Baud Rate         Mathematics Basic maths include Add  Subtract  Multiply and Divide  Also modulus  power  CJC  Perenthesis  eg   A1   A2  and access to any data item variable  A1  P1  D1 etc   see    Maths Variable  and Function Tables    on page 184  Full Maths and Scripting math with up to 100  character free form math expression for each pen available as an option        Front and Rear USB Ports USB host ports front and rear for data and setup transfers through these ports  External devices   keyboard or mouse   Barcode reader  or external mass storage device        Standard Screens and Custom Fully programmable display values in engineering units  Time  amp  date stamp on every division   Screens providing the current time and date    Sets of Standard screens are available to display data on a chart  digital reading  bargraphs or  numerous combinations thereof  Screen properties can be modified on the recorder and custom   ised to suit  Custom screens created in the Screen Designer software can be imported into the  recorder for specialist applications  Custom Screen firmware option is required    Digital values displayed include alarms on bars  engineering units  pen name  tag  time and date   20 character description and totalised values        Data Storage Removable Media  Compact Flash card supports up to 4 0 Giga bytes    Local Mass Storage Options  USB memory key   up to 
127. d 64Mb Not shown  50001011 503   Compact Flash card 128Mb  50001011 504   Compact Flash card 256Mb  50001011 505   Compact Flash card 512Mb  50001011 506   Compact Flash card 1GB  30   50006809 502   SX Display Bezel Touch Screen Assy   Includes Bezel  Touch  NEMA 4X IP66 Screen and Display  31 50004352 501   SX 12 1    Display  36   51453098 501   SX Case and Back Plate  39   50004348 501   SX Inverter and Cable kit                   43 TV 25 30 Iss 2 GLO June 06 UK    Table 10 2         Multitrend SX   Spares                                                       41 51453098 501   SX Case and Back Plate Not shown  42   50005458 501   SX Rear Terminal Cover kit Not shown  46   51453095 501   SX Chassis kit   50   50000871 501   SX Panel Gasket   51 50004292 501   SX Panel Clamp Assy  Qty 2  Not shown   52  51453038 501   Stylus Kit Black  pack of 5    53   50013947 501   Connector kit  2 of each connector Not shown   type    55  50017180 501   SX 12 1    Backlight Not shown  50017290 502   SX Screen Protector  Kit of 5  Not shown  51452129 501   10 Ohm Resistors Pack of 8 Not shown  50017181 501   QX SX Blanking Plate for I O Slots  2    Not shown  50001249 501   SX Portable Case Not shown       43 TV 25 30 Iss 2 GLO June 06 UK    165          166 43 TV 25 30 Iss 2 GLO June 06 UK    Section 11  Instrument Care and Maintenance    The X Series range of recorders contains no parts serviceable by the user  except for a  fuse on the DC power supply  see    Fuses    on page 12     
128. d Operating Conditions          Reference Rated Extreme Transport  amp  Storage       67   F to 77   F  19   C to 25   C    32   F to 122   F  0    to 50   C    32   F to 122   F  0   C to 50   C    14 F to 140 F   10 C to 60   C    Ambient Temperature                         Relative Humidity   RH  50 to 65  10 to 90  5 to 90  5 to 95        43 TV 25 30 Iss 2 GLO June 06 UK 179    Specification Tables                                        Specification Environmental and Operating Conditions  Vibration  Frequency  Hz  0 0 to 70 0 to 100 0 to 100  Acceleration  g  0 0 1 0 2 0 5  Mechanical Shock  Acceleration  g  0 1 5 20  Duration  ms  0 30 30 30  Mounting Position from Vertical  Tilted Forward 5   40   40   Any  Tilted Backward 5   65   65   Any  Tilted to Side       5   65   65   Any  Power Requirements  Mains Voltage  Vrms  220 to 240 100 to 250 90 to 264 N A  Low Voltage AC  Vrms  24     2 20 to 30 20 to 30 N A  DC Voltages 24     2 20 to 50 20 to 50 N A  Frequency  Hz  49 8 to 50 2 47 to 63 47 to 63 N A  Power Consumption QX  AC   lt 40W  max   DC   lt 40W  max  Typical 20W   SX  AC   lt 60W  max   DC   lt 60W  max  Typical 30W  Warm Up 30 minutes minimum  Seismic Qualification Complies with IEEE 323 1974 and or 1983 and IEEE 344 1975 and or 1987  option   Hardware    includes an IEC bracket                   The maximum rating only applies up to 104  F  40  C   For higher temperatures  the RH spec is de rated to maintain constant moisture content    LED Flash Codes    
129. d go to Main Menu  gt  Configure  gt  Layout and  select Load  The Device selection menu will appear to select the correct media  Enter a new  file name if required and press the Load button     Go to Main Menu  gt  Configure  gt  Layout  gt  Edit and the new layout will be loaded into the list  of Screens     To display the new Layout go to the Screen button in the Main menu bar at the top of any  process screen and select the next button to scroll through the screens     43 TV 25 30 Iss 2 GLO June 06 UK    Section 7  Firmware Options    Firmware Credit System    The credits system is a flexible way of changing the recorder features without having to up   grade the firmware  Simply purchase a number of credits to cover your current and possibly  future requirements and the recorder is delivered with the credits loaded  The credit value  in each recorder is displayed in the Factory menu  Select the Options button and by activat   ing and de activating the options in the credit list  the recorder will change its functionality     Table 7 1   Firmware Options                                                    Firmware option Credit Description   value   Full Maths  4 Full Maths   this can handle math expressions that can consist of expressions up to 100 charac   ters in length   Note 1    Full Maths with 6 A powerful multi line scripting ability available to solve complex state based applications  Eg    Scripting  building an application for     If    X happens  then Y will hap
130. d to become a customised user  However for global access restrictions  the user  must be allocated a security level of Engineer  Supervisor  Technician or Operator  even  though the individual permissions will differ     First Time    Password System Setup    The first time the system is used a default user name and password is available  the user  name is    Admin    and will have no password  this is known as the    first time    user  Access to  the first time user is removed once the password system has been configured  The first time  user is reinstated if the password system is reset    ESS   Extended Security System  CFR21 Part 11     The password system allows for user names to be typed in  All logging in and out activity is  automatically stored in the audit trail     If your recorder is fitted with the ESS pasword system follow these instructions  First Time Password System Setup     Add System Administrator    Your recorder is configured with ESS     Extended Security System     This is a password system that cannot be switched off       Follow these steps on first time power up   Administrator User name  1  Switch the recorder On    2  From the process screen press the Menu button in the top left of the  screen and select the Log In icon in the top right as shown here     3  A box will appear and prompt you to enter a User name  enter Admin  This is the first  time user login  Access to the first time login is removed once the password system has  been configured 
131. der x y  Returns x if it   s less than y  otherwise returns 0   Inside inside x y Z  Returns x if between y  amp  z  otherwise returns 0   Outside outside x y Z  Returns x if outside of y  amp  z  otherwise returns 0  Table 14 4    Timers Syntax Description  Trun trun x y  Starts the timer x in y mode   Mode 1   reset to  0 and run  Mode 0   resume from previous  value   Tget tget x  Returns the elapsed time of timer x since start  Tpause tpause x  Pauses the timer x  Treset treset x  Resets the timer x          Timers must return a value  so assign to a variable  e g BLKV1   tpause 1   Value returned    is the same as tget 1                                             Table 14 5    Accessors Syntax Description   Glbv Glbv x  Get the value of global variable number x   Locv Locv x  Get the value of local variable number x   Pen Penfx  Get the value of Pen number x   Ai Ai x  Get the value of Analogue Input number x   Di Di x  Get the state of Digital input number x   Tot TOT x  Get the current value of totaliser x   Alamct Almct x y  Get the current alarm count for Pen x  Alarm y   the alarm number as identified in alarm mes   sages    Alamst Almst x y  Get the current alarm state for Pen x  Alarm y   I   active 0   inactive        43 TV 25 30 Iss 2 GLO June 06 UK    187             188    Full Maths  amp  Script Processing    Table 14 6         Boolean Operators    Syntax    Description                                           Assign 7 Assigns one variable to another   e g 
132. dget are to be mapped to the same channel  Select the widget and go to  the    Map    in the Screen menu toolbar  Widgets have green grab handles around the edge     Pen and or channel information will appear for each object within the widget  Each object in  the widget can be assigned to the same or different Pen     For example a DPM menu will display the pen currently being used and a set of channel  information associated to the text  digital and alarm marker objects within the DPM widget   Select any of the objects in the channel menu to produce the setup screen              Figure 6 3   Channel mapping Setup  screen for a selected  widget or object       ALM MKR 1 Pen No  1 Alarm No  1  2  3  4 5 6            Pen No  1 Total            Pen No  1 Total    Select a Pen     a a fe ffa   Ls  7 Le  eo uw                 oa Cas  sen        Maximum    Input Channel           Average      Cancel      Total v  Cas LL LED                43 TV 25 30 Iss 2 GLO June 06 UK    Channel Mapping Setup screen  In the Channel Mapping Setup screen select where the data is from        Data from  Pen  set what the object is going to be showing  Current Value  Minimum value   Maximum value  Average pen reading or Total pen reading       Data from  Alarm for Pen  set the alarm number    Data from   nput Channel  set the channel number and what the object is going to be  showing  Analogue  Digital  Hi Pulse or Low Pulse    Select the pen number required  On a widget you can select the Parent to 
133. displayed   The mark on chart will show where the batch is started with   S  Batch Name      The next time you press the Batch button the screen will have changed to give you the Batch  Controls  The batch control buttons enable the user to Stop  Pause  Resume   Abort or add  a Comment to the current batch that has been started     A Batch is complete when it has been stopped  When a batch is stopped   E appears as a  mark on chart on the screen  If the batch is aborted it is not a complete batch and will be  marked on the chart with an   A to show it has been aborted     If the recorder is not logging  starting a batch will automatically start the logging  However  stopping the batch will not stop the logging     If a batch is Paused   P will appear as a mark on chart and the Pause button on the Batch  Control menu is replaced with a Resume button  When Resume is selected the screen will  be marked with   R     43 TV 25 30 Iss 2 GLO June 06 UK       Batch    Figure 4 7 Batch Control screen and Messages screen       Message    1 18 2006 fi June       552  1 18 2006  a    55 0   1 18 2006  YY S45    1 18 2006  50 4    1 18 2006  Stop 50 4   1 18 2006 HD Test batch run    P       1 18 2006 IIS start new batch  Comment          Finish    When the batch is stopped the Batch Control screen reverts back to the Batch Setup screen  so the user can start a new batch     Batch Setup screens    on page 87     As well as a Mark on Chart for every command applied to the batch you can chec
134. dits  displayed as a  number against the Credits item in the menu  Then select the Options item in the Credits  menu and enable the firmware options you require by changing the cross to a tick check  symbol     When the configuration is complete select the Finish button to Commit  Discard or Commit  Later  Select the Back button to return to the previous menu     Menu Path    As each button is selected in the menu system a menu path will appear at the top of the  screen to enable the user to know where they are in the system  The user can select these  buttons to return to previous menus and enables the user to jump back more than one menu  at a time     Select to go back  to previous menus   Serial No    100089      Credits   30      Menu path  dit Setup    A grey arrows indicates  a further sub menu           1000890302109      Options   25 Credits in Use        Help    Help is available on all menu screens and is context sensitive from each screen  The Help  icon will reside either in the top right or bottom right on all menu screens  All the Help files  have a Home button that will take you to the Help System main index  Navigating in the help  does not stop the logging     43 TV 25 30 Iss 2 GLO June 06 UK 37    Main Menu       Main Menu    Se wd SE  NE  Configure Alarms Screen    Select a button  to take you to    the next menu     gt      Recording Messages  102     e Configure   Configure the recorder through the Setup  Layout and Pass   words menus  See    Configure M
135. e    Username et  Info Password    E3 Support  E Sales al      Website             On recorders with password security enabled further login will be required to access Full Re   mote Control of the recorder from the web page and to enable a keyboard and mouse  For  users with Password functionality enabled Login is required  Enter your User name and  Password in the box to gain access to the recorder web page     43 TV 25 30 Iss 2 GLO June 06 UK 131       132 43 TV 25 30 Iss 2 GLO June 06 UK    Section 8  Communication    Comms Configuration    There are three main elements to set up for the communication link to work     e Device configuration for comms  See    Standard Communication Inter   faces    on page 133       Software configuration for comms  See    Comms and Trend Manager Pro  Suite    on page 135       Comms Server software set up  See    Communications Server    on  page 143     Ensure the same communications information is entered into the hardware and the software  in order for the communications link to work e g  Device name and ID   IP address of the  devices     Install TrendServer from the TrendManager Pro Suite folder and the comms server  and database servers install automatically     The Minitrend QX and the Multitrend SX devices have flexible and comprehensive com   munication facilities that are essential for the varied and demanding applications required  for data acquisition  These devices are fitted with a number of standard communication in   terfa
136. e  the tolerance is set for the input signal  Specify  as a percentage of the  scale range  the tolerance band allowed above and below the input signal   Select and enter a value     Fuzzy Band 2   Only available if the logging Type is set to Fuzzy  Toggles  On and Off  This is to enable a second tolerance to be set  configure it to be  On to activate  Only used in conjunction with Autofit On  to specify the Band  2      43 TV 25 30 Iss 2 GLO June 06 UK    e Band 2     Only available if the logging Type is set to Fuzzy  This is where  a tighter tolerance can be specified which must be set within the limits of  Band 1  Specify  as a percentage of the scale range  the tolerance band  allowed above and below the input signal  Select and enter a value     When the setup is complete go back to the Pen   menu and complete the pen setup     Alarms Menu   Main Menu  gt  Configure  gt  Setup  gt  Edit Setup gt  Pens  gt  Alarms     This is for setting up alarms on this pen only  Select the first available alarm eg  Alarm 1 and  configure each alarm         Menu path to current menu               Alarm 2 Lo  10 00   P1 Alm2    Alarm 3 None fe    Alarm 4 None fe         il                           Alarm 5 None   2    Enabled Always             Alarm 6 None  gt                               90 0      CCE    The Pen Alarms screen displays up 6  alarm set points per pen         Tag  Allow Change  Relays Out        Each alarm displays its individual  alarm setting           Select an alarm
137. e 06 UK    Functions and Features    Recorder Functionality    Minitrend QX and Multitrend SX recorders provide flexible electronic data acquisi   tion and recording in a high functionality instrument  Minitrend QX is a DIN standard  144mm format recorder with a 5 5    QVGA display and the Multitrend SX is a large 12 1     diagonal display format recorder      The Minitrend QX has up to 16 Analogue inputs and the Multitrend SX has up to 48  Analogue inputs  Both with at least 70Mb of available on board memory plus additional  removable storage media     e Both recorders use digital colour TFT LCD screens to provide easy to read displays with  wide viewing angles for the best all around data viewing       The touch screen operator interface provides fast  easy access to the recorder menus mak     ing set up and data analysis quick and efficient  Navigation through the menus and text  entry are direct and intuitive     Example of a recorder menu path from the Main Menu to change the Pen Scale configuration with clear rapid navigation    p       po  F1  Main Menu a 8 Configure    4 i  l Eu 7 q 7    4 Be                 h Configure 4 Alarms Screen   Setup j Layout Passwords   Edit   Save Load  JE  Cd T E Lg  Batch Recordin Messages  102  Settings    Process Status                            m     amp     O  Field 10 Pens Comms  ma onstan  een  Events General Screen                                                         0 000      Linear    Auto    None                           
138. e Fuzzy Logging data storage technique  as the periods of in   activity would result in compression rates of over 50 times     Example 3   Logged Data Example    The diagram below is a sample of actual logged data in both the Fuzzy Logging method  top   and Sample Logging method  bottom   derived from the same analogue input     43 TV 25 30 Iss 2 GLO June 06 UK 207    208    It provides an excellent illustration of how less data points can be used to construct an iden   tical trace        Fuzzy Logged f          Sampled Logged             Diagram 2     Note  This data extract was taken from a 56 hour temperature run  which resulted in approx   imately 1 Mbyte of sample data  and approximately 40 Kbyte of Fuzzy Logged data     A compression ratio of 25 times      Anything else it can do   Yes  Fuzzy Logging can be used as a    One Hit    recording button     In applications where the measured process is new or the ideal scan rate is unknown Fuzzy  Logging is ideal  as it adapts the log rate to the input signal  and can therefore find the opti   mum logging rate for you     Tolerance band widths    Tolerance band width can be set as a percentage of the scale range allowed above and be   low the input signal     A second band width can be set  this is where a tighter tolerance can be specified which  must be set within the limits of Band 1  Specify  as a percentage of the scale range  the tol   erance band allowed above and below the input signal  See    Logging Menu    on  page
139. e configuration have been made but the changes have not  been committed to the recorder  See    Commit Later    on page 104           Comms    Events General    Finish       Select a button to take you to the next menu    e Field 10   This button displays a sub menu containing Analogue In  Ana   logue Out  Alarm Digital IO and Pulse Inputs card menus  See    Field  O  Menu    on page 42    e Pens   This button displays all the configuration areas for setting up Pens  including Scales  Maths  Alarms  Logging and Totalisers  See    Pens  Menu    on page 51    e Comms   This button displays a sub menu containing Protocols  Web   SNTP and TCP IP menus  See    Comms Menu    on page 61       Events   Events is a firmware option that can be activated using the credit  system  Events are certain conditions or operations which can be set up  and logged according to the time and date of the occurrence  Subsequently  events can be reviewed in a list or represented on a graph  See    Events  Menu    on page 66     e General   This button displays a sub menu containing general recorder  information including Ident  Localisation  Factory  Batch  Printer set up and  Groups  Pens  menus  See    General Menu    on page 68    e Screen   This button displays a sub menu containing Screen Saver  Chart  speed and screen Brightness set up  See    Screen Setup    on page 76    43 TV 25 30 Iss 2 GLO June 06 UK 41    42    Field 10 Menu     Main Menu  gt  Configure  gt  Setup  gt  Edit Setup gt  Field
140. e occurs USB order rec   ognition is lost     43 TV 25 30 Iss 2 GLO June 06 UK    Export Now     Main Menu  gt  Recording  gt  Export Now   Export Now will transfer data to the external media such as Compact Flash or USB key   Select the Export Now button to go to a sub menu of available external storage devices     Buttons become active when a device is fitted  Once fitted the size of the device memory  and the amount of available space is displayed     Select the desired device to export to and this will display two options New and All  The All  function will export all the data in the recorder   s memory to the external device port  The New  function will just export any new data since the last export was made to this port     If an Export Now is requested within 5 seconds of a Scheduled export being activated  the  manual export will not occur     Scheduled Export     Main Menu  gt  Recording  gt  Scheduled     Set up Scheduled exports to transfer data at timed intervals  from internal memory to exter   nally attached devices  Compact Flash or USB storage key     Select the Scheduled button to go to a sub menu of available external storage devices     Buttons become active when a device is fitted  Once fitted the size of the device memory  and the amount of available space is displayed     Select the external device to copy the data to and choose a time period from the list  This  will copy data at the time period stated until the device is full or is deactivated     If a
141. e recorder to identify Modbus  messages  Applications that talk to the recorder with Modbus will need to know this number  to return messages to the device  Comms Server must the same number must match     Recorder Name   This is the name displayed in the top right any process screen on the re   corder or found in Main Menu  gt  Configure  gt  Setup  gt  Edit Setup  gt  General  gt  Ident  gt  Name     43 TV 25 30 Iss 2 GLO June 06 UK    Communications Server    Status   This will automatically enable the designated port and the device will become ac   tive  This can be activated later from the main Comms Server screen     The Test button gives information regarding which Modbus protocol variant that is being  used  The test box shows both Modbus and Modbus X readings being received to help de   termine which protocol is correct for this device     Edit a Device    Select the Comms port containing the device for editing and right click on the device either  in the left or top window  The Edit Device Details dialog box will appear showing the config   uration for comms with that device  Any fields not greyed out can be changed  For Ethernet  devices the IP address can be changed  Any device can be made active or inactive from  here  For active Modbus devices  the recorder name and protocol variant can be changed   modbus vs Modbus X   For an inactive Modbus device the device profile can also be  changed     The Test button gives information regarding which Modbus protocol vari
142. e same password is available on another user login  The User name and password cannot  be the same    Retry Lockout    A password retry lockout option is available  if the user enters the incorrect password for a  preset number of times in a row  the account must be de activated and only an Administrator  can re activate the account  The account can be reactivated in 2 ways    Retry  amp  Preserve Password  Reset retries  unlock  and preserve password  allowing user to have another try    Retry  amp  Reset Password  Reset retries  unlock  and reset password which must be changed on first login     43 TV 25 30 Iss 2 GLO June 06 UK 107    108    User Interface requirements    No Activity Timeout    A    no activity    timeout programmable from 20 to 3600 seconds  which will automatically log  out a user after a defined period of inactivity at the menu system or web page     Level Names    The level names  such as Operator  Technician  Supervisor  Engineer are for internal refer   ence and are displayed as defaults  it is possible for the user to change the group names to  suit their personnel structure  This is stored in the policy set up for the Password configura   tion     Audit Trail  A full audit trail is available and is stored as a message log     Trail Rules    The audit trail cannot be turned off and will always be generated for the password system   Audit Trail Entries  Audit trail is generated for the following actions   e User log On Off and source  Recorder  Web   
143. e used to start  stop or reset par   ticular groups of pens  To set up Groups see    Pens Menu    on page 51    By Pen   Select this to start  stop or reset individual pens   View   Use the View button to just display the Totals values for each Pen that is totalising     When the configuration is complete select the Finish button to Commit  Discard or Commit  Later  Select the Back button to return to the previous menu     43 TV 25 30 Iss 2 GLO June 06 UK 95    96    Status Menu   Main Menu  gt  Status     Use the Status menus to easily check on the current configuration of the recorder     number  of status information screens are available to the user  these will provide information for re   porting and diagnostic purposes     La          Recording Diagnostics     lt q       The following Status screens are available    e System   information about the recorder setup such as Device information   software and firmware versions  the recorder IP address  firmware Options  and Hardware in the recorder    e Pen Overview   Pen configuration details    e Maintenance   Recorder Health watch for preventative maintenance  This  is a Firmware activated option that requires credits     e Recording   Status of all Pens currently recording    e Diagnostics   Complete diagnostics for Field IO  Comms and Media   Comms is a Firmware activated option that requires credits    Printing Screens    All the Status screens have a Print button  to execute this  the printer must first be configured 
144. e user would just type A2       43 TV 25 30 Iss 2 GLO June 06 UK    Full Maths  amp  Script Processing    Script Function Application Examples    To enter a script for a Pen  ensure that    Maths Type    in the Pen Menu is set to Scripting     Example 1    4 flow meters are fed into the recorder to trend  totalise and record daily flow  The application  requires that the user must know and record which flow meter is outputting the highest flow  at any particular time  This can of course be derived from the four lots of recorded data  but  not only is this extra analysis later  but a real time display is required     The application is easily solved by using the Script Function in the recorder  represented in  pseudo code the script is as follows     If input 1 is bigger than all the others  then make the global variable  1  equal to channel 1   and display and record input 1     If input 2 is bigger than all the others  then make the global variable  1  equal to channel 2   and display and record input 2     If input 3 is bigger than all the others  then make the global variable  1  equal to channel 3   and display and record input 3     If none of the above are correct then Input 4 must be the highest  so make the global variable   1  equal to channel 4  and display and record input 4     Display the global variable  1  on another pen to show which channel is biggest at any given  time     Pen 5 is chosen to record the highest channel input  and channel 6 is chosen to record
145. ed in the Calibrated  CJ Temp column     The Measured Temp column will display the actual temperature using the Calibrated CUC  Temp  on channels with T C fitted  For more details of how a thermocouple works  refer to     Appendix C  Thermocouple Connections    on page 197     Select the tick box to go back and the Finish button to Commit  Discard or Commit Later     Demo Traces   Configure  gt  Setup  gt  Edit Setup gt  General  gt  Factory  gt  Demo Traces     A set of demo traces available for demonstration or simulation purposes     Options for each demo trace are     e    e    No Simulation   Demo traces are deactivated and no simulation traces are availa   ble     Simulate if board not fitted   Simulation is activated when an Analogue In card is  not fitted in one of the top two slot positions     43 TV 25 30 Iss 2 GLO June 06 UK    73    Reset Setup   Configure  gt  Setup  gt  Edit Setup gt  General  gt  Factory  gt  Reset Setup   This will remove the current setup from the recorder and return to the default setup  When  you select this button the    Reset Setup Warning    box will appear with a message     Are you    sure you want to clear your current setup  This is an irreversible and will re start the  recorder     Select OK to reset the setup or Cancel to ignore and return to the Factory menu     Delete All Data   Configure  gt  Setup  gt  Edit Setup gt  General  gt  Factory  gt  Delete All Data   This button will delete all data from the internal memory  When you
146. elay card are outputs  channels 7  amp  8 can be either  inputs or outputs    Note  Pulse Input only available on channels 1 to 4 for slot G 17 to 20  for slot H and 33 to 36 for slot I     Output    Output only   The relay outputs can be set to be either Latched or  Single Pulse  A Latched relay will be maintained in its active state until the  trigger source has returned to a non alarm state  unless acknowledged    For Single Pulse the relay will go active for a period of time  specified by the  user  then return to a non active state  The time out period remains inde   pendent of the length of time the active state remains  If the output is set to  Single Pulse  when the alarm is activated the signal will display a single  pulse for the duration set  See Pulse Duration  The alarm will trigger again  when it goes back into an active alarm state     NOTICE    Outputs that are set to Single Pulse should not be used as a part of  a maths expression as it can cause spurious values        Pulse Duration    Output only   Available when Single Pulse is selected   Specify the pulse length in seconds from 0 1  100ms  to 6480  108 min   utes  in 0 1 second increments  Select and enter the pulse length     Failsafe    Output only   Toggles On and Off  Each relay channel can be  independently selected with the fail safe option  This will invert the state of    43 TV 25 30 Iss 2 GLO June 06 UK    the relay output  With Failsafe Off  normally open  NO  relays have open  contacts when the
147. elect and choose the alarm logging rate units from the drop down menu     Alarm Rate   This is the new logging rate used when this pen goes into an  active alarm state  To enable this feature to change the logging rate in an  alarm state  see Change Log in the Alarms menu    If the Millisecond option is selected as the Alarm Rate Units for the log   ging  then a drop down menu of options will appear  When all other Alarm  Rate Units are selected a keypad will appear for user entry     Method   Only available if the logging Type is set to Continuous  Select  from a list of Methods    Sample  logs the last sampled reading    Average  logs the average of all the samples taken since the last log   Max Min  logs the highest and the lowest of the sampled readings since the  last log     Align   Only available if the logging Type is set to Continuous  Select and  enter a value from the list to align the logging at specified intervals  This  will hold the start of logging until the aligned time selected occurs based on  the recorders real time clock     Auto Fit   Only available if the logging Type is set to Fuzzy  Toggles On and  Off  AutoFit ensures that the last sampled data point is logged before the  signal goes out of the tolerance set in Band 1 or Band 2  When displayed  on a graph  the input signal will automatically fit to this last logged point   This gives a better fit for stepped input changes     Band 1     Only available if the logging Type is set to Fuzzy  This is wher
148. ell do Brasil  amp  Cia  Phone    55 11  7266 1900  FAX    55 11  7266 1905    Chile   Honeywell Chile  S A   Phone    56 2  233 0688  FAX    56 2  231 6679    Mexico   Honeywell S A  de C V   Phone    52  55 5259 1966  FAX    52  55 5570 2985    Puerto Rico   Honeywell Inc    Phone    809  792 7075  FAX    809  792 0053    Trinidad   Honeywell Inc    Phone    868  624 3964  FAX    868  624 3969    Venezuela   Honeywell CA   Phone    58 2  238 0211  FAX    58 2  238 3391       Honeywell Process Solutions    Honeywell    2500 W Union Hills Drive  Phoenix  Arizona 85027    www honeywell com ime pi    43 TV 25 30  June 2006     2005   2006 Honeywell International Inc    Honeywell    
149. ements of BS EN 61010   1 2001    Safety Requirements for Electrical Equipment for Measurement  Control and labo   ratory Use    and UL 61010C 1 and CSA 22 2 1010 1  If the equipment is used in a manner  not specified  the protection provided by the equipment may be impaired     43 TV 25 30 Iss 2 GLO June 06 UK 181       182 43 TV 25 30 Iss 2 GLO June 06 UK    Appendix B  Maths Expressions    Full Maths  amp  Script Processing    The X Series recorders are supplied with Basic Maths functions  Add  Subtract  Divide  and Multiply  There are two further options that can be added  Full Maths and an  extremely powerful Scripting processing module  Scripting delivers an additional level of  enhanced capabilities with multi line script processing  Full and Scripting Maths must be  activated in the recorder as a Firmware credit option     When a recorder setup is loaded into the TrendManager software the Maths capabilities  will be transferred with the setup  If you are creating a new recorder in TrendManager  software to be transferred to a recorder the Maths capabilities will be available but will only  become active if the recorder has the same Maths functions enabled     This document provides the Maths Variable and Function table and examples of the capa   bilities from the simple to the complex to assist the user in understanding the concepts and  potential of these features         Important Note  Full Maths and Script functions are Options and must be enable using  the Credit
150. en Setup Menu   Super   visor Access  All of the    Appearance       Screen menu buttons require  Supervisor access    Permission Area 25     115    116                Figure 5 6 Default password access from the Alarms Menu       Alarms menu   No Login           Ack Alarm   Operator  Configure   Operator  View Alarms   No Login    re    ma    Configure Alarms requires  Operator access  Permission Area 9               View Alarms requires No Login   Permission Area 5     J   Ack Alarm        Ack Alarm menu      E   2 2   Operator access   a      Permission Area 8              All of the Acknowledge    Alarm buttons require   lt  Pl  Back Finch Operator access              Figure 5 7 Default password access from the Screen Menu    Screen menu   No Login required   Permission Area 2     Edit   Supervisor access  Replay   No Login required  List   No Login required    Clean Screen   No Login required  Clean Screen    q HE     g o0 MnTrend  a PSD Expert Ext   11 May 06 14 54 10  ini 14440100     1460400 146200 ESS 100 00 Pen 1  Finish gso 001452300  ae sa  en    Replay  List and Clean Screen  buttons require No Login access                        Screen Edit   Supervisor access  All of the Edit functions in the status  bar require Supervisor access    43 TV 25 30 Iss 2 GLO June 06 UK    Figure 5 8 Default password access from the Process Menu    Process Menu   No Login required    Max Min   No Login  Totals   No Login                       Totals Menu   No Login required          
151. entry  This will automatically update and    be displayed on the Menu bar at the top of the process screen  The recorder uses a 24 hour  clock     43 TV 25 30 Iss 2 GLO June 06 UK 83    Tick to confirm the setup changes and return to the Settings menu  Select the cross to ignore  any changes and return to the Settings menu     From the Settings menu select the Finish button to commit the changes or select the Back  button to return to the previous menu        84 43 TV 25 30 Iss 2 GLO June 06 UK    Alarms Menu     Main Menu  gt  Alarms  gt      Acknowledge and Configure Alarms by categories     wi Alarms    Ack Alarm    Acknowledge Alarm        Main Menu  gt  Alarms  gt  Acknowledge Alarm     User acknowledgment of alarms can be performed at this menu  Latched and Normal  alarms can be acknowledged     When a Latched alarm is set up in the Pen  Alarms menu and a latched relay is configured   it will maintain its active state until the alarm has been acknowledged     A latched alarm will continue to flash  if an alarm marker is displayed  until it is acknowl   edged and it is out of alarm state  Normal alarms can also be acknowledged  See    Alarm  Markers    on page 125 for flash colour identification     Ack Alarm    All   Select this button to acknowledge all active alarms  latched and normal alarms     By Group   Select this button to acknowledge any alarms in a group of pens  Pen  groups can be set up in the Pens menu    By Pen   Select this option to acknowledge any alarm
152. enu    on page 39       e Alarms   Displays the current alarm status  Alarm configuration and their  associated condition  See    Alarms Menu    on page 85      Screen   The Screen Menu an Edit button to configure Pen Channel map   ping  Replay previous data  Screen List to change the screen currently  being displayed and Clean Screen facility  See    Screen Menu    on  page 86    e Batch   The Batch function manages sections of data  Batch markers are  configured by the user and are used to identify and analyse batches of  data  See    Batch Setup Batch Control    on page 87    e Recording   Display the current recording status of the unit and allows  recording control  See    Recording Menu    on page 90    e Messages   Displays all or specified message types  See    Messages  Menu    on page 92    e Process   Controls for any process in use eg  Max Mins or Totals can be  controlled from this screen See    Process Menu    on page 95    e Status   Displays status information screens that are available to the user   these will provide information for reporting and diagnostic purposes  See     Status Menu    on page 96    e Finish   When an operation is complete use the Finish button to Commit   Discard or Commit Later  See    Finish    on page 104    e Help   The Help icon appears as a question mark on all menu screens  The    Help files are context sensitive and will supply information for each menu  screen where the icon appears  See    Help    on page 37    43 TV 25 30 Iss
153. er software  for  the recorder selected  in the top window     Destination    A Local Server Input Reg Ch  1 Sample   Th e Database logging Local Server Input Reg Ch  2 Sample    Local Server Input Reg Ch  3 Sample   tab displays th e pe ns Local Server Input Reg Ch  4 Sample    logging to a database  for the recorder select     edinthe top window  Client connections    aa    72       A third tab  Diagnostics  can be enabled using the  Administration button  and selecting Preferences     Client Connections    Realtime comms data from the device will only display on the comms server communica   tions status screen when realtime data is active on either the server software or by using an  OPC client  Once data is active on a client connection  this window will display details of the  device selected in the top window  its Destination or where the information is going to   Source or origin of the data  channel or event   Rate and Type of data sampling being com   municated  See    OPC Interface   Open Process Control    on page 140  and    OPC Cli   ents    on page 142     Database Logging    This tab will display information on what is currently being logged to a database for the de   vice that is selected in the top window  its Destination or where the information is going to   Source or origin of the data  channel or event   Rate and Type of data sampling being com   municated     43 TV 25 30 Iss 2 GLO June 06 UK    Communications Server    Comms Server Setup    The comms ser
154. erence with a specified temperature  The reference junction is kept at a con   stant known temperature other than 0  C  This temperature can be specified in the setup  menus  This reference temperature is then used in the same way as the reading from the  temperature sensor using the Internal Reference method     Diagram shows passive burnout  for active burnout replace the   for       43 TV 25 30 Iss 2 GLO June 06 UK 199    Thermocouple CJC Compensation    External Input Reference                                                                                                                      Copper wire  A   H Normal    signal  g processing     Input A  terminals Temperature  on rear reading to maths  panel of Thermocouple Sxpression  recorder Table  convert R T       y  temp to Volts  C   Reading in Volts     Inputs    Volts  Look up table  a    PT100 D added    gt   converts   V  w   C D  voltage read   EE   ing to tem   perature                                Thermocouple Copper  cable wire    External Input Reference  The reference temperature reading in this method is provided  by a separate temperature measuring device connected to another input  usually RT  This  input is processed in the normal way and then passed back into the thermocouple signal    processing system as a temperature reading     200 43 TV 25 30 Iss 2 GLO June 06 UK          Appendix D  Alarms    Alarms Menu     Main Menu  gt  Alarms  gt      Acknowledge  Configure and View alarms from this menu 
155. es  Re transmission of Math Results  Re transmission of Process values    Control Outputs    Analogue Output Specifications    Resolution   0 002  or better   Accuracy       0 1  0 500ohm load      0 25  500ohm   1Kohm load  Maximum load resistance   1Kohm   Isolation   300V AC   Outputting   0 to 20mA or 4 to 20mA  over range capability to 21mA     Update rate   250mSec per channel    Pulse Input Card    The Pulse Card is available as an option  and will fit in slots normally allocated to Al cards   The frequency output from the card is fed to the Maths block  as per other inputs  and is  represented by HPULn  where    n    is from 1 to 4  when the card is fitted in the top slot     e Frequency   1 Hz to 25kHz  this will update once per second    e Inputs   4 x isolated inputs     43 TV 25 30 Iss 2 GLO June 06 UK 169    Analogue Input    Analogue Input    User Defined Maximum Input Ranges    For values entered for the Range Type in the    Analogue In Menu    on page 44     Table 12 1   Analogue In Ranges                                  Preset Ranges eee Preset Ranges Maximum  Voltages Voltages  50V 52V 1000mV 1 1V  25V 26V 500mV 600mV  12V 13V 250mV 300mV  6V 6 5V 100mV 150mV  3V 3 25V 50mV 75mV  1 5V 1 6V 25mV 36mV  0 6V 0 8V 10mV 18mV  0 3V 0 4V 5mV omV                      Alarm Digital Input Specification    170    Minitrend QX recorder has one    slot    for digital inputs and alarm relay outputs on one card   All alarm card channels provide 240V AC isolation channel t
156. ete  Password Security screens   A  dit Trail  sissisota i   ESS etes   First Time Password Setup   ESS                Level Permissions Table 00      Log OMON nimes   Users and Groups ee  Passwords ra   Add User sr   Administrator se i   Change Passwords   Delete User 5m   First Time Login oes   Levels ccruinne   POLICY  aena   Reset Passwords     ssssssseeseeseeseee   User Administration ee   USGTS  issus  Passwords Setup First time ESS  Pen Overview Status                  Totaliser  Policy  FASS WOLDS annees  Ports   RSASS ANR AR R ne 61  Ports  COMMS iii 65  Ports  Ethernet ii 61  POMET up Sonate  Preface sssri  Print Support  Printer Menu  Process Menu   Max Nitti 8 a A A Rennes   Totals   Start  Stop  Reset            Process Screen Overview  Processor Board   Battery Safety    sccsssssssstteissidicicisserscvessesivessssessctbess  Protocols   nn ani anne nih  Pulse Input Card   Channel Numbers   Connection Details   Di  STOSUUCS   cssscscscssssssassseavcasoasctenstacsnddecetccataresatiadtece    Pulse Input Menu ns 49             43 TV 25 30 Iss 2 GLO June 06 UK    Q                OX Standard Screens    s 32  Quality and Safety  CE Mark scsi en RAER 181  Safety eoi oot a R o anii 181  Quality and Safety Appendix A    181  R  RS485  Connections ormaren sevsdestecdesnenvacesiedescvexsessnsve 23  Rear Port  sister Ale AA 61  Recorder Functionality  Overview  E EE EAA E AE E E E ENE Gia 27  Recorder Setup sssri 35  Default Time Zone     essssssessseessseresesrerisesreresrs
157. exactly 16 bytes by trailing  0x00 characters    Recorder type   is a combination of the OEM series  name followed by the OEM device name  truncated to  16 characters    Software version is of the form nn XX eg 00 FQ                   e Page 25   Number of data block records  byte 23  always equals 05 for the  Trendview range  data blocks are always in order     00   Analogue inputs  02   Digital inputs  03   Digital outputs  06   Pens  09    Totalisers     216 43 TV 25 30 Iss 2 GLO June 06 UK    Index    A    AC POW  anne nroniemmetnnens  AI Calibration eee  Factory Calibration       sesesesiseeiesiereiesrrerrrerrrerrserrrern  Acknowledge Alarm  Add Screen en mememauseronn  Administrator  Passwords sss  Alarm Markers  ssssssisssrisssrissrrrseeies  Alarm Marker Flash Colours oo     Alarm Messages   sso  Alarm Relay Card Connections  4 and 8 Alarm Relay Cards  Channel Numbers    sssseseesiesiessssissisiessessesressessesresse  Alarm Digital IO Diagnostics 0     Alarm Digital IO Menu uieccssccccccsecsesccteseesiies  Alarm Relay Card ssnnisisisianenuinnsss  Digital IO Card isa an  Alarm Digital Input Specification                 170  Alarms Appendix Decco  201  Alarms Ment ES Re er  Acknowledge Alarm  Configure Alarms oo  esseeseeeeseeeeeeeneatens  View Alarms  seenen ta A ERER  Alarms  Pens ins  All Messages    essiri  Analogue In Menu  Analogue Input Card    15  16  CJC Connectors 17  Channel Numbers  Connection Details      ccccceeesceseseeeceeceseseeeseeeeees 16  Current Inp
158. f 200 global variables                    184 43 TV 25 30 Iss 2 GLO June 06 UK    Full Maths  amp  Script Processing    Table 14 1   Maths Variable Table                               Maths Variables Syntax Description   Pstv PSTVx Get the persisted Global variable x  Persisted  global variables maintain their value through a  power cycle  There is a maximum of 50 per   sisted global variables    Compact Flash free storage CFFREE Returns the percentage of free storage space   space available on the Compact Flash card   USB1 free storage space USB1FREE Returns the percentage of free storage space  available on the USB storage key fitted initially   front or rear     USB2 free storage space USB1FREE Returns the percentage of free storage space  available on the USB storage key fitted after  the first USB has been fitted  front or rear     Batch Mode BATMD Returns 1  batch running  2   batch stopped or  3   batch paused   Internal memory hours left INTHRS Returns the amount of hours left until the inter           nal memory starts to recycle  over write            Table 14 2   Maths Function Table                                                             Maths Functions Syntax Description  Add   Returns the result of the addition  Subtract   Returns the result of the subtraction  Multiply    Returns the result of the multiplication  Divide   Returns the result of the division  Sin  sin x  Returns the SIN of x  Cos  cos x  Returns the COSINE of x  Tan  tan x  Returns the TANGEN
159. f Fo                    43 TV 25 30 Iss 2 GLO June 06 UK    Appendix H  Calibration    Al Calibration and CJC Calibration    For Al and CJC Factory and User Calibration see    Calibration    on page 71    Sensor Compensation    Sensor Compensation may be required to improve accuracy on a sub range  This is an ad   justment to the value of the signal input on each channel  based on the Engineering units     To set this up in the recorder see Sensor Comp in the menu for    Analogue In Menu    on  page 44    Single Point    Set the Comp Type to Single Point to adjust the signal input reading by an offset amount  determined by the user  Enter the Offset adjustment required and this is added or subtract   ed for all future readings     Dual Point    Select Dual Point to change two points on the signal input reading  The Dual Point adjust   ment works in the same way but at two different points on the signal input  The two points  must be more than 50   of the engineering units  away from each other     Low Eng and High Eng are the two points where the adjustment offset is made  The user  can enter their own adjustment points on the signal input and enter the Offset for both  points     Figure 20 1 Dual Point Compensation      Comp Type   Dual Point      Low Eng   0 0      Low offset   5 0        High Eng   100 0      High offset    5 0      Res Ru ee         Compensation Type   select from None  Single Point or Dual Point compensation     43 TV 25 30 Iss 2 GLO June 06 UK 211    21
160. for Deviation   Toggles On and Off  When this is  activated  you can set a tolerance level for an alarm  It allows a specifed  percentage value of the span of the scale to be added to the alarm level     Hyst Level      not available for Deviation alarm   Enter as a percentage  of the span of the scale  This is how much tolerance the signal can have  past the set alarm activation point until the alarm is de activated  The exam   ple in Figure 4 3 shows the alarm activating at 40  which is the set low  alarm level  The alarm is not de activated until the signal is at 50   which is  10  past the set alarm level  So the Hyst Level   would be set to 10    Reverse the process for a high alarm     Damping   Toggles On and Off  Damping is a time delay that works going  into alarm only  When switched On  the alarm level must be breached for a  specific period of time before an alarm is triggered     Damping Time   Set the amount of Damping time in seconds    Reflash   Toggles On and Off  Activate this to re enable an active alarm  that has been acknowledged  Set the Reflash Time     43 TV 25 30 Iss 2 GLO June 06 UK    e Reflash Time   Only enabled when Reflash is active  Set the time period  after the alarm has been acknowledged for the alarm to reflash if it is still in  an alarm state     When the setup is complete go back to the Pen   menu and complete the pen setup     Figure 4 3 Hysteresis Level  100         Alarm de activated  at this point            10  Hysteresis level      
161. for each pen       DPM and Scales 16 Horizontal Bars  showing Max Min values and  Totals for each pen    43 TV 25 30 Iss 2 GLO June 06 UK 31    32    Functions and Features    Minitrend QX Standard Screens    The Minitrend QX recorder has up to 20 screens displaying multiple combinations of charts  bars    and DPMs can be configured  6 examples below     0001  Turbine 1  Screen 10 Jan 06 14 16 47    Pen 1  81 26                                                 Horizontal Chart and DPMs    Ta      gt  E 0001 Turbine 1  Menu 18h 3 Screen 10Jan06 14 16 47    0001 Turbine 1  Screen 10Jan06 14 16 47       en    en 3 en 4    1 400 _  3 200 _  9 000 _                 1   Pen 1 A  2 20  Total 1 0 00      17 100     1  Total 3 0 000  Pen 5    Total 5 0 00  Pen     1 22    Total  0 00 _       Horizontal Chart  4 Vertical Bars  and 4 DPMs    0001  Turbine 1  Screen 10Jan06 14 16 47          39 700             0001  Turbine 1    Screen 10 Jan 06 14 16 47                                              DPMs and Scales        gt  wl 0001 Turbine 1  18h    3 Screen 10 Jan 06 14 16 47  20 00 4000 6000 60 00 p 100 00Pen 1  10 000 20 000 30 000 40 000 50 000 60 000  14 42  10 000 20 000 30 000 40 000 50 000 60 000 re  2   0 000  5 000  104000 15 000 20 000 25 000 30 900 35 900 40 000              n 3  0 00 20 00 40 00 60 00 80 00 ia 100 00  56 550  0 000 5 000 10 000 15 000 20 000Pen 4    20 00 4000 60 00 80 00  100 0022 000  RE PER al ES ear me RE CET ee      en 5  20 00 40 00 60 00 80 00 100 00 
162. functions are available to meet a wide range of applications and  requirements including  Power  Water Treatment  Thermal Processing  Food and Beverage   Pharmaceutical Biotech and Manufacturing industries     This manual explains the product functionality operation  configuration and communication  as well as Safety Precautions  Installation  amp  Wiring  Recorder Setup  Troubleshooting and  Spares List  It is recommended that the user reads the manual before installing and operat   ing the recorder     Supplementary documentation    Supplementary documentation to accompany these recorders are     Table 1 1   Supplementary recorder documentation       Manual Part number          TrendManager Pro V5  amp  X Series Software Suite   43 TV 25 11                Screen Designer X Series Recorders 43 TV 25 31  Specification   Minitrend QX 43 TV 03 10  Specification   Multitrend SX 43 TV 03 11             Documents can be downloaded from the web site at www  XSeries info net     Notes    e The contents of this manual are correct at the time of issue  The contents may  change at any time without prior notification  This is due to continuous develop   ments to the recorder and it   s functionality     e Every effort has been made to ensure the accuracy of this document  however  should there be any anomalies found  please contact your nearest Honeywell  supplier  See back page for contact addresses    e All rights are reserved  No part of this manual should be copied or reproduced    
163. ged       On alarm   An alarm is triggered  the unit will not return to screen saver till the alarm state is  inactive and another screen saver time out period has expired     Charts   Main Menu  gt  Configure  gt  Setup  gt  Edit Setup gt  Screen  gt  Charts     A Chart speed is the time it takes the data to travel from one side of the screen to the other   The recorder has up to 10 different chart speeds  There are 3 categories that can be set   Slow  Medium and Fast  default   Set up each category to display the desired chart speed   Limits are in place so that each speed cannot overlap  Eg  a Medium speed cannot be set  faster than the Fast speed     When complete go to Finish  gt  Commit to implement the new set up     Fast Speed     600mm h to 6000mm h    Medium Speed   20mm h to 120mm h      Slow Speed     1mm h to 10mm h  Once the charts speeds have been set up in this menu go to a process screen displaying  data on a chart and touch the screen  This will activate the Settings menu in the top right of  the screen  select this to display the 3 categories set  See    Chart Speeds    on page 124   Brightness   Main Menu  gt  Configure  gt  Setup  gt  Edit Setup gt  Screen  gt  Brightness   Set the recorders screen brightness using the instant brightness slider   Default screen brightness is 80   Adjustable between 10  and 100  of full brightness     Set the brightness level  tick to agree  then go to Finish  Commit to permanently apply the  change     43 TV 25 30 Iss 2 G
164. gnition problems  Exem   ples of tested barcode readers are      e Peninsula Phoenix 2 e Wasp   WWR 2905 Pen Scanner    Quick Scan QS2500 e Barcode Traders LC4400 Series    43 TV 25 30 Iss 2 GLO June 06 UK    Section 3  Overview    Functions and Features       Up to 16 Analogue Inputs  for the Minitrend QX and  up to 48 for the Multirend  SX      mA  external shunt     ohms      mV    Thermocouple    RTD          Data Storage media     Compact Flash   up to 2Gb    e USB ports for keyboard   mouse and storage            Volts         QX   Up to 192    soft alarms       6 per pen  SX   Up to 576    soft alarms       6 per pen             QX   Up to 32 Totalisers     1 per pen   SX   Up to 96 Totalisers     1 per pen                                         QX   Up to 4 Analogue Outputs    SX   Up to 8 Analogue Outputs Fast Scanning Mode     QX   8 Inputs  SX   16 inputs                                      QX   Up to 8 Pulse Inputs  SX   Up to 24 Pulse Inputs       24V Power Supply                      24V Transmitter Power  Supply          QX   Up to 8 Relay Alarm Outputs  SX   Up to 24 Relay Alarm Outputs                               QX   Up to 16 Digital Inputs   Common Relay Output    24V Outputs  SX   Up to 48 Digital Inputs   y   24V Outputs Communications      TCP IP  RS485 Modbus  slave    e 10 100 Ethernet  Web and FTP   e USB ports for keyboard and mouse      OPC Server                                     Key    Standard                         Crystal Clear Display  
165. goes below this limit and if the No  Backflow option is active     Restrict Range   Normal Totaliser only  Toggles On and Off  When active  the totaliser restarts at Min range once it reaches Max range     Min  Range   Normal Totaliser only  Only available when Restrict Range is  active  Select and enter the minimum limit for the totals to range to     Max  Range   Normal Totaliser only  Only available when Restrict Range is  active  Select and enter the maximum limit for the totals to range from     Use Remainder   Normal Totaliser only  Only available when Restrict  Range is active  Toggles On and Off   If the total exceeds the maximum range set  the total will reset to the mini     43 TV 25 30 Iss 2 GLO June 06 UK    mum range set  When Use Remainder is active  it will carry over any  amount in excess of the maximum range set       Temp Input Units   For Sterilisation  select the temperature input units      Start Temp   For Sterilisation  select the Start Temperature    e Ref  Temp   For Sterilisation  select the Reference Temperature    e Z Factor Temp   For Sterilisation  select the Z factor temperature   e Include Cooling   For Sterilisation  Include Cooling if required    e Completion Value   For Sterilisation  if cooling is not required  enter a  Completion Value  The totaliser will stop at this value     e Numb Format   Displays the Notation of the number format  Scientific or  Normal     e   Notation   Toggle between Scientific or Normal number format   e    Auto  
166. grammable 100 char   acter free form math expression for each pen  Math calculations available on all pens  one per input  plus 16 extra pens for the QX and 48 extra pens for the SX recorder  Scripting maths includes condi   tions and multi line scripting in pen maths expressions  Allow functions  permanent variables and  constants        Vutronik Recorder Connection   optional  QX Recorder only    Optional rear cover with 50 pin connector for direct connection to the recorder  TDC2000 3000 sys   tem using Vutronik Trend Recorder  24VDC instrument power only           Miscellaneous       Optional customer ID Tagging  3 lines of up to 22 characters each line            Specification table for Sterilisation  The definition of Fo Po is the sterilisation pasteurisation time in minutes required to destroy a stated number  of organisms with a known z at temperature T  For example   F18 250  represents the time in minutes required to destroy a stated number of  organisms at a temperature of 250  F  121 11   C  with a z   18 degrees F  F values are used to compare the sterilizing values of different proc   esses  however  F values cannot be compared unless the z values are the same  When temperature is not specified  for example  F   8 6  it   is understood that the temperature is 250  F  121 11   C   the subscript O  as in the term Fo   7 4  is used to indicate that the z   18 degrees F  and the temperature is 250  F  121 11   C         Specification    Parameter    Environmental an
167. h East Asia  Phone    65  6355 2828  Fax    65  6445 3033    Thailand   Honeywell Systems   Thailand  Ltd    Phone    662  693 3099  FAX    662  693 3085    Taiwan R O C    Honeywell Taiwan Ltd   Phone    886 2  2245 1000  FAX    886 2  2245 3242    EUROPE   Austria   Honeywell Austria GmbH  Phone   43  316 400123  FAX   43  316 40017    Belgium   Honeywell SA NV  Phone   31 0 205656999  FAX   31  0 165330746    Bulgaria   Honeywell EOOD   Phone    359  2 79 40 27  FAX    359  2 79 40 90    Czech Republic  Honeywell spol  s r o   Phone   420 54324 5014  FAX   420 54324 5011    Denmark   Honeywell A S   Phone    45  39 55 55 55  FAX    45  39 55 55 58    Finland   Honeywell OY   Phone   358  3  2727625  FAX   358  3  2728600    France   Honeywell SA   Phone   33  0 1 60198075  FAX   33  0 1 60198201    Germany  Honeywell AG   Phone   49  69 8064336  FAX   49  69 806497336    Hungary  Honeywell Kft    Phone   36 1 451 4335  FAX   36 1 451 4343       Italy   Honeywell S p A    Phone   39 02 9214 6503  FAX   39 0292146377    The Netherlands  Honeywell B V    Phone   31 0 205656999  FAX   31  0 165330746    Norway  Honeywell A S  Phone   45  39 55 55 55    Poland   Honeywell Sp  zo o  Phone   48 22 6060900  FAX   48 22 6060901    Portugal   Honeywell Portugal Lda  Phone   351 21 424 5000  FAX   351 21 424 50 99    Romania   Honeywell Bucharest  Phone  40212110076  FAX   40  40212103375     Russian Federation  RF    Z A O  Honeywell   Phone    7 095  796 98 00  FAX    7 095  796 98
168. h devices ID and IP address   Use the comms server software to set up the devices on a database and configure log   ging for each device  The devices will need to be set up on the TrendServer soft   ware before the connections can be tested and become active     43 TV 25 30 Iss 2 GLO June 06 UK 153       154 43 TV 25 30 Iss 2 GLO June 06 UK    Section 9  PC Software Suite    The TrendManager Pro Software Suite    The TrendManager Pro Software Suite complements the capabilities of the    X Series    recorders  by providing the benefits of viewing  configuration  network communications  database management   data analysis and report generation using a personal computer  It ties the process together  providing  for real time or FTP communications with the recorders through a Local Area Network  LAN      TrendViewer    This is the standard software provided with the recorder that displays and prints data imported from  the storage media used by the recorder     TrendManager Pro   This is an advanced data analysis archiving software package  providing full configuration of the re   corders  TrendManager Pro is a stand alone package that delivers to the user total recorder con   figuration  allowing the user to archive  graph  print and export data  TMP also allows files to be  exported using comma separated variables  CSV  format  that can be imported into most computer  software     TrendServer Pro   This is a fully network aware software package for real time viewing and archivi
169. h pen is displayed  Select and activate which  scale is required to be displayed     ee Charts  DPMs and Scales   Select which pen is displayed  Select and activate  which scale is required to be displayed     43 TV 25 30 Iss 2 GLO June 06 UK    e Showing  Pens    Depending on the Template Type selected  choose  Pens  Scales  Max Min values or Totals  depending on what is set up to be  displayed  Multiple Scales can be displayed by selecting more than one  scale    e Orientation    Not DPMs   Set the orientation to Vertical or Horizontal for  Scales and Charts     e Cycle Scales    active with chart and scale combination   If ticked  the  recorder will cycle through each pen in the form of a scale or bar chart  depending on which is selected for the Scale Indicator      e Scale Indicator    active with chart and scale combination   Select which  indicator  either bar or pen pointers  will indicate on the scale     e Background   Background colour can be set if no template is used  Select  and choose from the Colour palette     When the configuration is complete select the Finish button to Commit  Discard or Commit  Later  Select the Back button to return to the previous menu     Add Screen    To add a new screen just select Add Screen and configure as required     Delete Screen    To Delete a screen just select Delete Screen to produce a list of current screens  Select the  screen to delete and it will be removed immediately     Save Layout     Main Menu  gt  Configure  gt  L
170. hances the management of data collected in a non continuous process  known as batch  processing  used in thermal treatment  sterilisation  food processing and chemical reactions     Batches are controlled with command lines entered into the recorder  these include Start   Stop  Pause  Resume and Abort batch  Batch Markers are placed on to the recorder   s chart  and entered into the messages system for every batch command applied     Other Standard features       CE Mark   Conformity with 73 23 EEC  Low Voltage and 89 336 EEC EMC Directive       Soft Alarms   6  software  alarms per pen are easily set up to display and record selected  out of limit conditions  These can be tied to the relay or digital outputs to activate the user   s  external equipment       Common Relay Output   A separate relay output at the rear of the unit can be set up as an  alarm output       Communications   the recorder supports Modbus TCP IP  slave mode   web and e mail  over Ethernet  DHCP standard  communications port and Modbus RTU  slave mode  via an  RS485 port  USB ports allow the use of an ASCII barcode reader     43 TV 25 30 Iss 2 GLO June 06 UK 29    Functions and Features     _ Independent Display Chart Speeds and Logging rates   logging rates can be pro   grammed completely separate from the chart display speed  allowing the data to be dis   played and stored at the rates that best suit the application     e Language Support   standard language prompts for English UK  amp  US  French  Ge
171. hat triggers just one effect eg  A pen going into alarm and a  Totaliser starts  this could have the effect of starting Logging        An event can have one cause that has two effects  eg  A pen could go into alarm and the  effects could be that the alarm is acknowledged and a Totaliser is started  See    Event 1  example     on page 67        An event can have two causes that have two effects  eg  A pen goes into alarm and a Total   isers is started  the effects could be the alarm is acknowledged and a mark on chart is dis   played to show the start of the totaliser    When selecting Totalisers and Alarms etc  ensure they are enabled and configured in the  Pens menu     Table 4 3     Events   Cause and Effect     on page 68 for a full list of Causes and Effects     66 43 TV 25 30 Iss 2 GLO June 06 UK    Figure 4 5 Event 1 example     Event 1 example  Adding Cause 1    Enabled    ml    Sub Type Into Alarm          Select which Pen number  and which alarm on that  pen  will have the alarm  acknowledged        Event 1 example  Adding Effect 2 ee  Edit Setup      z p Outputs  Type Totaliser  ss    Sub Type   Start       am je  crt      43 TV 25 30 Iss 2 GLO June 06 UK       67    Table 4 3   Events   Cause and Effect                                                 Cause Effect  Into Alarm  Alarm Out of Alarm  Acknowledge Alarm  Mark on Chart    Start aging  Totalisers Stop Totaliser  Reset Digital Outputs  On Alarm Acknowledge  Digital Inputs Off  State Change  T C Burn Out Anal
172. he TrendServer software via remote comms servers and  remote database servers  Remote servers means it is not directly connected to your PC   Figure 8 3 shows an example of two local systems having access to each others remote  servers     TrendServer 1 can access Comms Server 2 and Database Server 2 and all the devices  within the databases on those servers  Similarly TrendServer 2 can access the devices  and databases held on Database 1  and Comms Server 1     43 TV 25 30 Iss 2 GLO June 06 UK 139    140    Comms and Trend Manager Pro Suite    Figure 8 3 Remote Network    Logged to Database       TrendServer 1                                                                                           Data   Comms Database base  Server 1 D        Server 1  Software     Software  nes Data   FE SAS a PR  g base  Logged to Database        Data   Comms Database base  Server 2                    _ gt      W Server 2  Software pu Software  aasan Data   ET base             TrendServer 2       OPC Interface   Open Process Control    OPC Server connection must be enabled in the recorder by selecting the OPC option in    Credits     on page 70  Many types of OPC Server software packages are available and are compat   ible with the recorders  OPC server supports OPC DA version 3 and OPC AE  Alarm and  Events      OPC limitations    Technically speaking there are no restrictions on the number of clients that can connect to  OPC DA or OPC ARE servers     Some software limits are in place li
173. he channels are in the    Channels logging to selected  database    window they can be selected and the Edit and Delete button become active  The  Edit button allows the logging rate or type of logging to be changed     There is also a Database Events Logging box that can be ticked that allows any events to  be logged to the database     Summary of Logging Changes   If any changes are made using the Edit button  the Sum   mary of Changes button becomes active  this will show the last changes made to any of the  channels for this configuration only     The Delete button will take the channel out of this window and put it into the window showing  available channels for logging  logging will stop for this channel     Comms Server Database    p This is the database icon which will appear in the bottom right of the screen  T to show that the Trend Server software is running with the Database server    active  Loads automatically with TrendServer     152 43 TV 25 30 Iss 2 GLO June 06 UK    Comms Server Database    System Setup    The system can be set up two ways     1  For customers who are setting up in preparation for the arrival of their devices  Using  the TrendServer and Comms Server software  create a database for the device s   and configure each device for logging using the comms server  When the devices are  in place and connected check the IP address  for Ethernet devices only  and the device  ID is correct    2  For larger networks   Set up the hardware first noting eac
174. he feature within the recorder     e More credits are available from your supplier     Serial No     Credits    Options Code 1000890302109 Fast Scan  5     Options       100089 Maths  4 6    Full Maths    30 Events  6        25 Credits in Use Le Totals  4     Custom Sern  4        Maintenance  2     43 TV 25 30 Iss 2 GLO June 06 UK    Firmware Credit System    Remote Viewer    The Remote Viewer is a firmware option that first needs to be activated in Options  see     Credits    on page 70     To allow access to the recorder   s web page  the web browser must be enabled from the re   corder  To enable the Web Browser go to    Web    on page 63     To access the recorder   s web page  type in the recorder   s IP address in to a web browser  such as Internet Explorer  If Microsoft WINSTM system  Windows Internet Name Service  is  available then the recorder name can be used to search for the recorder web page     To find your recorder IP address see    TCP IP    on page 64    Select Remote Viewer to enable a desktop user interface  This will allow you to view your  recorder in realtime     Honeywell  gt   a  0001  Turbine 1        X 18h   169   Screen   24Jan 06 12 42 38  Series Pen Pen 2 Pen 3 Pen 4  4     100 00 1000000    00000    A 0 H      General 00000  al g  00 A 0000   lt  Pens   4 ae d 200000  8 00 58     m29080      Alarms         Pen 8      100 00        Hardware bh             Pen en 6 Pen 7  f 7 4 0 00      Remote Viewer E      r   __               Status   View Mod
175. he input  between 1 and 4  that is the highest rate  P6 GLBV1    NOTICE    Please note    Pn     is not entered in the Maths Block and is assumed by the Recorder  e g  To enter the equation P2 A2  the user would just type A2       Example 2    In the same application as above  the user has noticed that whilst flow meter 2 normally has  the highest flow rate  on occasion a surge in flow meter 3 causes problems down stream   The user needs to monitor the two inputs and count the number of times flow meter 3 read   ing exceeds that of flow meter 2     The code consists of the two flow meter readings  and a change counter that totals the  number of times that flow 3 exceeds that of flow 2     The pseudo code is written as     If flow meter 3 has a larger reading than flow meter 2  check to ensure that it was already  greater than meter 2  if it was return the latest change count value     If it was not greater than meter 3 last time  set a flag to indicate a change and increment the  change counter by 1  then return the latest change counter     If flow meter 3 is less than 2  simply return the change count value with no increment     Pen 7 is used to implement this script and is implemented as follows    43 TV 25 30 Iss 2 GLO June 06 UK    Full Maths  amp  Script Processing    if  A3 gt A2  Tests if A3 is bigger than A2     if BLKV1  1  If it was then tests if A3 was bigger than A2 last  time period     return BLKV2  If it was return with the current change counter     else If n
176. he new user is responsible for remem   bering their own password  The Administrator will not be able to access this information  But  the Administrator is able to reset the password for any user     Users   Main Menu  gt  Configure  gt  Passwords  gt  User Admin  gt  Users     This will list all the current users that have been entered into the password system and their  access details  Select a user to produce the following     e User Name   Displays the user name   e Level   Select a permission level from the drop down list    e Custom   Activate this to allow customisation of the permissions access for this user only   The custom settings will reflect the original Level set when the user was first added     43 TV 25 30 Iss 2 GLO June 06 UK      Edit   Allows customisation of the permission areas  The Administrator can re assign the  permission areas for individual users at any level     e Login Days   Select the days on which this user can Login     Delete User   Main Menu  gt  Configure  gt  Passwords  gt  User Admin  gt  Delete User     This will list all the current users that have been entered into the password system  The Ad   ministrator can delete users from a drop down list     Note  Administrator cannot be deleted   When the configuration is complete select the Finish button to Commit or Discard  Select  the Back button to return to the previous menu   Unlock User   Main Menu  gt  Configure  gt  Passwords  gt  User Admin  gt  Unlock User     This will list the cur
177. her high   level protocol is used  For TCP IP  this is done using a protocol called Address Resolution  Protocol  ARP      Example     Device X has an IP address of 195 23 37 1 and sends data over the Ethernet channel to  another IP based device  Device Y with IP address 195 23 37 2  Device X sends the pack   ets of information containing an ARP request  The ARP request is asking the device with the  IP address of 195 23 37 2 to identify the address of the Ethernet Interface     Only Device Y with the IP address of 195 23 37 2 will respond  sending a packet with the  Ethernet address of device Y back to device X  Now device X and Y have each others Ether   net addresses to which data can be sent     43 TV 25 30 Iss 2 GLO June 06 UK 203       204 43 TV 25 30 Iss 2 GLO June 06 UK    Appendix F  Fuzzy Logging    What is Fuzzy Logging     Fuzzy Logging is a real time Data Compression technique  Patent no  US 6 405 155 B2   developed at Honeywell as an alternative to the more standard methods of recording data     Paperless Recorders are primarily used for exception recording  They spend most of their  life trending and recording straight lines  Fuzzy Logging has been developed to improve the  efficiency of data storage  and is particularly effective in exception recording examples  where normal operation consists of generally static inputs     Fuzzy Logging looks for straight lines in the data stream  in real time  whether they are hor   izontal  climbing or descending  A straigh
178. igital Input n  1 to 48   Digital Input bit pattern DIOn Get the 16 bit pattern from the DIO slots  where    n  1 2 or 3  Slot G  H  amp    respectively    Returned as a 16 bit word  0 to 65535   A  channel configured as an output is set to 0              RT Compensation RTCOMPn Get RT Compensation value for channel n  1 to  48  Units mV   RT Calibration RTCALn Get RT Calibration value for channel n  1 to  48   Units mA   CJC CJCn Get the Board CJC value  N   1 to 6  Returns    value in Degrees F  C or K depending on the  localisation setting       CJC in Degrees C CJCnC Get the Board CJC value  N   1 to 6  Always  returns value in degrees C        Pulse Inputs  Al slots  HPULn Get the Pulse frequency from the Pulse card n    1 to 48  25kHz max                 Pulse Inputs  DIO Slots  LPULn Get the Pulse frequency from the Digital Input  card when in Pulse mode n   1 to 48  1kHz  Max    Pen Minimum Value PnMINU Gets the Pen Minimum value n   1 to 96   Pen Maximum Value PnMAXU Gets the Pen Maximum value n   1 to 96   Alarm Level PnAxL Gets the Alarm Level  n is Pen number 1 to 96    and x is alarm number 1 to 6             Totaliser Tn Get Totaliser value n   1 to 96  Comms Variables CVn Get the Comms variable n   1 to 96  Blkv BLKVx Get the local variable x  This variable is local to    this script  There is a maximum of 20 local var   iables per script        Glbv GLBVx Get the global variable x  This is a global varia   ble accessible to all scripts  There is a maxi   mum o
179. illiamps    4 to 20  0 to 20     0 2  F S  0 01     C  Ohms  200 0 to 200     0 1  F S  0 01     C  Ohms  500 0 to 500     0 1  F S  0 01     C  Ohms  1000 0 to 1000     0 1  F S  0 01     C  Ohms  4000 0 to 4000     0 1  F S  0 01     C  Input Actuation Range Reference Accuracy Temp  Stability       Thermocouples   F   C     F       C  B  500 to 1000 260 to 538 8 1 4 5  1000 to 3300 538 to 1816 4 0 2 2 0 01     C  E   454 to  328  270 to  200 21 6 12   328 to  94  200 to  70 3 1 1 7 0 01     C   94 to 1832  70 to 1000 1 3 0 7  J   346 to 32  210 to 0 3 1 1 7 0 01     C  32 to 2192 0 to 1200 1 2 0 7  K   454 to  94  270 to  70 36 20 0 01     C   94 to 2502  70 to 1372 1 8 1  R   58 to 500  50 to 260 6 7 3 7 0 01     C  500 to 1202 260 to 650 2 7 1 5  1202 to 3214 650 to 1768 2 0 1 1  S   58 to 500  50 to 260 5 9 3 3 0 01     C  500 to 1832 260 to 1000 2 7 1 5  1832 to 3110 1000 to 1710 2 0 1 1  3110 to 3214 1710 to 1768 2 5 1 4  T   454 to  346  270 to  210 9 7 5 4 0 01     C   346 to 752  210 to 400 1 8 1  L   328 to 32  200 to 0 2 2 1 2 0 01     C  32 to 1652 0 to 900 1 3 0 7  G   W_W26  32 to 212 0 to 100 45 25 0 01     C  212 to 600 100 to 316 11 2 6 2  600 to 1526 316 to 830 5 0 2 8  1526 to 2759 830 to 1515 3 1 1 7  2759 to 4199 1515 to 2315 5 0 2 8  C   W5  W26  32 to 356 0 to 180 4 5 2 5 0 01     C  356 to 2228 180 to 1220 3 6 2  2228 to 4199 1220 to 2315 6 7 3 7  M   NiMo NiCo   NNM90   58 to 698  50 to 370 2 0 1 1 0 01     C  698 to 2570 370 to 1410 1 4 0 8         
180. ing a new one  To start  a batch enter information in all the required screens that have previously set up in the     Batch Menu    on page 74          Name   Name to Identify the batch      User ID   Identification of user starting the batch  If Passwords are active on the recorder  then the User ID page will be skipped for user entry and will be automatically entered       Lot No   Add a batch Lot No   if required    Desc   Enter a description of what the batch is      Comment   Add any further comments    If Allow Direct Access has been setup in the    Batch Menu    on page 74 then a Barcode  Reader can be used to make entries for all the items listed in this menu  See    Barcodes  for Batch    on page 75     Figure 4 6 Batch Setup screens    Name   Batch 017    User ID  017    Enter Batch Name  Lot No   Lot 1  Desc    Start Batch 17  Batch 017    Enter Additonal Comments  optional         Bu mg Fun meg    Press the Finish button if all the Batch details are correct and you wish to start the batch  immediately  Use the Back button to return to the Batch setup and not start the batch     43 TV 25 30 Iss 2 GLO June 06 UK 87    This icon changes to show  a batch is in progress    ial  Menu 0 creen 18 Jan 06 10 51 23  48 00 10 49 00  10 50 66  10 51 00 Pen 1  Jan 06 18 Jan 06 18 Jan 06 18 Jan 06 67 23    A  e  gt  0001  Turbine 1    Start Batch  Mark on Chart    Pen 2          Batch Mark on Chart    A Batch Mark on Chart will be placed on all process screens that have a chart 
181. inimum of 5 alpha char   acters  Allows the use of symbols and numeric characters  no spaces     e Default Password maximum length is 20 characters  4  Enter your new password  then repeat to confirm   5  The password dialog will appear confirming the change has been successful   6  You have now completed creating an Administrator     You can now enter the password system to check and reset the default Policies  eg  Pass   word Expiry Time   Main Menu  gt  Configure  gt  Passwords  gt  User Admin  gt  Policy     Refer to the Password section in the User manual for more information     User Name Description    User names are case dependent however duplicate user names will not be allowed even if  case does not match  The user name and password cannot be the same     Minimum Access Level    A feature to allow the minimum level access is available  For example  when a batch starts  the recorder will block access to all users of access level Technician and under  so techni   cians and operators would not be able to log on after a batch start  When a batch ends then  the minimum access level can be reverted to including operator     Calendar Function    Day of week restriction is required for all levels apart from Administrator  this will consist of  any combinations of 7 days  An everyday selection is available     Password Policy  See    Policy    on page 81     Duplicate Passwords    Duplicate passwords are allowed for different users  otherwise this would alert a user that  th
182. ion for a configuration to be partially completed but to be commit   ted at a later date  This will retain the new set up or the changes to the existing setup until  they are required  A partially completed setup will not be maintained over a power failure     If Commit Later has been executed  a warning message will display for Edit Setup  Edit Lay   out and User Admin  Passwords  screens  This is to alert the user that the changes have  been made to the configuration and not committed in the recorder  The user can Discard the  changes or continue to do changes and then Commit them     Setup Modified    This setup has been modified but  not committed  Select to discard  the existing changes or continue        43 TV 25 30 Iss 2 GLO June 06 UK    Section 5  Password Security    Log On Off    If ESS  Extended Security System  Password security is active on your recorder a password  is required to enter the menu system and process screens  Limited access is available with   out logging on  see Table 5 1 on page 109     When Log On is required the Log On button will appear in the top right of the Main Menu  screen  The Log On button can be set to switch to auto Log Off at a specified period of time   To Log On select the Log On button at the top right of the Main Menu screen     Log On   User is presented with a user name and password box   First time user login is    Admin     No password is required  Access for   the first time user is removed once the password system has been 
183. ion is complete select the Finish button to Commit  Discard or Commit  Later  Select the Back button to return to the previous menu     Factory   Main Menu  gt  Configure  gt  Setup  gt  Edit Setup gt  General  gt  Factory     The Factory menu contains information on the Firmware Credit System  Upgrading the re   corder Firmware  CJC and Analogue Input Card Calibration  Demo Traces  Reset Setup  function and a Production only menu     zi SE 9     Credits FW Upgrade Calibration    ao     Demo Traces Reset Setup Delete All Data    ala A       Credits   The Credit menu contains the Serial no  of the recorder  how many credits are  available  displays the Options Code and lists what Firmware Options are currently active   See    Credits    on page 70    FW Upgrade   The Firmware Upgrade button allows new versions of the recorder firmware  to be loaded into the recorder  See    FW Upgrade    on page 71    Calibration   Analogue In and CJC Calibration can be performed per slot  card   See     Calibration    on page 71    Demo Traces   A set of demo traces are available for demonstration or simulation pur   poses  See    Demo Traces    on page 73    Reset Setup   Select this to clear the current setup  A Warning message will appear before  activating the reset  See    Reset Setup    on page 74     Delete All Data   This button will delete all data from the internal memory     When the configuration is complete select the Finish button to Commit  Discard or Commit  Later  Select the 
184. ions module that plugs into the back of the  recorder  This is a Master Slave system where the recorders are slave devices    Front and Rear USB Communication Ports  The front and rear of the recorder is fitted with a USB communication port   The USB Host ports will provide an interface for       Data downloads      Setup uploads      External keyboard  amp  mouse    Barcode reader    e Mass storage device  USB key     A Comms    TCP IP    Finish       43 TV 25 30 Iss 2 GLO June 06 UK 61    62      Modbus   Modbus can be used with RS485 or Ethernet ports  See    Moa   bus    on page 62    e Web   Enables web access to view the recorder web page  See    Web    on  page 63    e SNTP   Simple Network Time Protocols  See    SNTP    on page 63    e TCP IP   Transmission Control Protocol   Internet Protocol  See    TCP IP     on page 64    Modbus   Main Menu  gt  Configure  gt  Setup  gt  Edit Setup gt  Comms  gt  Modbus     Modbus can be used with RS485 or Ethernet ports  The Modbus protocol defines a mes   sage structure that controllers will recognise and use  regardless of the type of network over  which they can communicate        Enabled   Toggle On and Off    e Port   Select this for a list of available Protocols  either Ethernet or RS485   For port configuration see    Ports    on page 65    e Protocol   Select this for a list of available ports  Modbus or Modbus X    Modbus and Modbus X can both use Ethernet or RS485 Ports  Protocols  define the format in which the data is
185. is available then the  device name can be used to search for the device web page     A Login Screen will appear for users with Password functionality enabled  Enter the pass   word protected User name and Password supplied to log in here  For Users without Pass   word security just choose a language option to access the web page     For Remote Viewer access see    Remote Viewer    on page 137     To find your device IP address  see IP Address on    TCP IP    on page 64 or go to the Sys   tem  General screen in the    Status Menu    on page 96     Internet Security Settings    Types of web browser for use with the Remote Viewer include Internet Explorer 5 and  above     Figure 8 4     Internet Security     on page 143 shows an example from Internet Explorer  6 on a Windows    XP machine  The settings shown are for Internet access  If the device is  to be accessed in an intranet scenario then the same has to be done for Local intranet op   tion     Firewall settings    If this device is sitting on an enterprise network with a firewall in place then the firewall  should be configured to allow all requests on port 80 and port 976  for remote control ac   tiveX      Access to the firewall settings will differ depending on what firewall is installed     43 TV 25 30 Iss 2 GLO June 06 UK    Communications Server    Figure 8 4 Internet Security     gt  Saar ee ee    Internet Options         General Security   Privacy   Content   Connections   Programs   Advanced    Security Settings  
186. iser set   tings  See    Totaliser Menu    on page 57    Group   Groups of pens can be specified and tagged with a group number  to display on the recorder  Select this to display the list of available Pen  Groups  Select which group you want this pen to be added to     Colour   Each Pen has a Default Pen Colour but this can be changed if  required  Select and use the colour palette to set the pen colour     43 TV 25 30 Iss 2 GLO June 06 UK 51    Trace Width   Select and set the Trace Width for this pen when it is dis   played on a chart  The default trace width is 1 with a maximum of 7     When the configuration is complete select the Finish button to Commit  Discard or Commit  Later  Select the Back button to return to the previous menu     Scale Menu   Main Menu  gt  Configure  gt  Setup  gt  Edit Setup gt  Pens  gt  Scale     Individually configure each scale per pen in the scale menu           Menu path to current a     Pen 1   100 000    Basic Maths   0 000    Linear      Auto          None    Select the Scale button to take you to the Scale menu    Click on Scale to set up each scale profile per pen     52    Units   Scale measurement Units  Select this and enter the units  Up to 16  characters     Span   This is the highest value of the scale  Select to enter the Span  value     Zero   This is the bottom of the scale  Select to enter the Zero value   Scale Type   Toggle between Linear or Logarithmic  Log      Divs Select   Only available with Linear Scale Type  Toggle
187. itions  2 shown    2 clamps are re   quired on opposite  sides of the unit       43 TV 25 30 Iss 2 GLO June 06 UK 11    Electrical Installation    Electrical Installation    12    Installation Category    e Installation category   Installation category II  Pollution degree 2       Follow National and local electrical codes for installation in a Class 1  Div 2 area     For voltage  frequency and power refer to the appropriate Specification sheet  See    Sec   tion 12  Technical Data  amp  Specifications    on page 169     Fuses    There is a fuse situated on the DC input version power supply  type 2A time delay  this can  be replaced by the user  Replacement of fuses should be carried out by qualified service  personnel     If the fuse should blow again there is probably a problem elsewhere within the unit and the  recorder should be returned for inspection to your authorised Honeywell distributor or Hon   eywell Service department     Cables    To fully comply with the requirements of the CE Mark  all cables connected to the rear of  the unit should use screened cable terminated at both ends  A low impedance earth cable    lt 50 mQ  must be connected to the earthing stud on the rear of the recorder  to ensure  that the recorder is always earthed     Before performing any installation please read the section on    Safety    on page 2 and     Warnings and Safety Precautions    on page 3    All connections to the unit are made via the rear panel  the layout of which is shown in 
188. its    on page 70   For this example this will be Pen  4     In the pens menu for the totalising pen  Pen 4   select Edit Maths and enter    T    followed by  the pen number you wish to totalise eg T3  Pen 4 is now set to totalise the value of Pen 3     It may be necessary to set a larger scale for the totalising pen  pen 4  as the totalising value  may become larger than the pen scale of the pen being totalised  pen 3      When the configuration is complete select the Finish button to Commit  Discard or Commit  Later  Select the Back button to return to the previous menu     43 TV 25 30 Iss 2 GLO June 06 UK 59    Go to the recorder   s process screen and select a screen showing DPMs  The totalising pen   pen 4  will display the totalising value of pen 3        60 43 TV 25 30 Iss 2 GLO June 06 UK    Comms Menu   Main Menu  gt  Configure  gt  Setup  gt  Edit Setup gt  Comms     Standard Communication Interfaces    Rear Ethernet Communication Port    The rear of the recorder is fitted with an Ethernet10 100 port and RS485 port  which sup   ports     e RS485 Modbus protocol and TCP IP Modbus    Web Browser  See    Web    on page 63    e OPC Server connectivity to third party software  OPC Server connection must be  enabled by selecting the OPC option in    Credits    on page 70  For more details  on OPC Servers see    OPC Interface   Open Process Control    on  page 140    Rear RS485 Port    e RS485  2 wire to support Modbus RTU     This can be supported as a separate communicat
189. k lists     e Rating   24Vdc 1A Resistive Load    Digital Input Cards    Three options for digital inputs are available    8 Digital Inputs    8 Digital I O card  this 8 channel card allows the user to configure each channel to be either  relay output or digital input  24V DC 1 Amp rated  resistive load   Each channel on this card  can be used as either a relay output or digital input  The relay contacts are form A  NO  and  includes suppression     43 TV 25 30 Iss 2 GLO June 06 UK 171    172    Alarm Digital Input Specification    16 Digital Inputs    16 Digital I O card  this 16 channel card allows the user to configure each channel to be ei   ther relay output or digital input  24V DC 1 Amp rated  resistive load   Each channel on this  card can be used as either a relay output or digital input  The relay contacts are form A  NO     and includes suppression     Digital Input Functions    The digital inputs can be used for the following actions     e A Digital contact on an input can be used to enable or disable one or any combination of    alarms      Can be used in Maths expressions    e Can have current status indicated on DPMs  Bars and Charts    Failsafe Relay Positions                                        Table 12 2    QX and SX Relay Positions  no alarms active   NO NC  Normal  Relay Output Power On Open Closed  States Power Off Open Closed  NO NC  Failsafe  Relay Output Power On Closed Open  States Power Off Open Closed             43 TV 25 30 Iss 2 GLO June 06 UK 
190. k the Mes   sages screen for details of the batch activity     Batch Commands    e    IIS   Start Batch     E   End or Stop Batch  this will complete the batch run     P   Pause the batch in progress     R   Resume batch  Only available when a batch has been paused     A   Abort batch  If the batch is aborted it is incomplete and the batch will be cancelled          User ID  Displays the user entered ID or User ID entered automatically by the Pass   word function       D   Description  User entered description of the batch in progress    L   Lot No  User entered Lot number for the batch in progress     IC   Comment  Extra comment field of additional information for the batch in progress    43 TV 25 30 Iss 2 GLO June 06 UK 89    90    Recording Menu     Main Menu  gt  Recording   This will display the current recording status of the recorder and allow recording control     Recording Methodology    The X Series recorder uses a new and powerful method for recording  Data is acquired  at  pen specific rates  processed and stored in the large on board Flash memory  This memory  operates in a cycle mode such that the oldest data is overwritten by the newest     When data is exported from the X Series recorder this does not delete that data from the  recorder but retains it for further or future downloads  With this method the user can export  multiple copies of the same encoded data  giving extreme security     Pa Recording    Recording Currently 4 pens recording     Start Stop    
191. ke     43 TV 25 30 Iss 2 GLO June 06 UK    Comms and Trend Manager Pro Suite    OPC DA Server  Maximum number of groups that can be added per client is 3     Maximum number of unique items that a OPC DA server supports is 100  l e  Number of  pens   Number of totalisers   Number of communication variable  spread across 3 groups  per client     Recommended number of clients that can connect a OPC DA server is 3     OPC A amp E Server    Number of active alarm that is maintained at a given time is 576  Includes pens having active  alarms and pens which have normal but unacknowledge alarms if latch enabled     Recommended maximum number of event subscriptions is 3    An OPC client can be used instead of the TrendServersoftware  It is a user software ap   plication for realtime interface between servers and clients  Information from our comms  server  which is OPC compliant  uses an industry standard method of uniform data inter   change  The OPC client can then export realtime communications to other applications   eg  Microsoft    Excel     How OPC works    When data acquisition devices conform to the OPC standard  you can use them with any  OPC enabled software application  And vice versa  You can therefore easily combine differ   ent devices from different manufacturers in one system  OPC gives you the freedom to add  new hardware from third party vendors to existing set ups  or to replace a device  without  worrying about compatibility with your chosen software  Select the h
192. lay all the pens available                  Pens 2     Pens 3     Pens 4       Pens 5 of Pen5  0 00   5000 00  p gt        Pens 6   Pen 6  20 00   200 00  D       d    Menu path to current menu    x Pen 2  50 00 to 500 00       y Pen 3  10E9 to 10E22      y Pen 4  10E1 to 106  De      The Pens screen displays  all the available pens           Each pen displays its  scale settings            Select a pen number to  edit the setup of each pen  including the Scale   Logging  Alarms and  Totaliser       Click on individual pen number to set up each pen profile     Enabled   Toggle On and Off     Tag   Select and use the on screen keyboard to type in an identifier for the  pen  Up to 48 characters     Maths Type   Analogue signals may have a mathematical calculation per   formed on them before they are represented as a pen  Basic maths is  standard in all recorders  Full Maths or Math Scripting are options that must  be activated  See    Options    on page 97    Edit Math   Edit the Math for this particular pen  For details see    Appendix  B  Maths Expressions    on page 183     Scale   Select Scale to go to a sub menu to set up the scale parameters   See    Scale Menu    on page 52    Logging   Select Logging to go to a sub menu to set up the logging config   uration  See    Logging Menu    on page 53    Alarms   Select Alarms to go to a sub menu to set up the alarm profile   See    Alarms Menu    on page 55    Totaliser   Select Totaliser to go to a sub menu to set up the total
193. ls       No Login gives access to all     Access levels can change for each menu  for example Operator or above access is required  to get to the Configure menu  Once in the Configure menu the operator level can only ac   cess the Passwords button  Setup is Technician or above access and Layout and Settings  are Supervisor or above access     43 TV 25 30 Iss 2 GLO June 06 UK 111    Figure 5 1 Default password access from the Main menu     Configure Menu   Operator  Access  See Figure 5 2 for    Configure menu access    Permission Area 13        5 Configure a  P    Setup     Layout   Passwords                   Batch a  a ala  la  Stop Pause Abort                         Permission Area 10                          LA    Totals                   Process Menu   No Login  required  See Figure 5 8  for Process menu access    112    Alarms Menu   No Login  required  See Figure 5 6  for Alarms menu access    wd Alarms a  ise     Ack Alarm Configure   View      Back Finish           hl al  ME     Screen    Recording Messages  102              Batch Control   Operator Access   All of the Batch Control menu  buttons require Operator access    0                Process    status a  ELEC       System Overview Maintenance       Pa    Recording Diagnostics    Back    Status Menu   No Login  required  All of the Mes   sages buttons require No  Login access    Permission Area 3        Screen Menu   No Login  required  See Figure 5 7  for Screen menu access    Permission Area 2                
194. ls of access to areas within the recorder menu system                                                                 gt  No Login  Permission Area Admin   Engineer   Supervisor Technician   Operator ie  Perm Area 23   Configure V4 V V4  Settings  Perm Area 24   Configure V4 V4 V4  Layout  Perm Area 25   Screen V4 V4 V4  Setup  Perm Area 26   Pens V4 V4 V4  Perm Area 27   Events V4 V4 V4  Perm Area 28   General vA v   All   Perm Area 29   Comms vA V4  Perm Area 30   Comms   vA V4  Modbus  Perm Area 31   Comms   vA V4  Web  Perm Area 32   Comms   vA V4  SNTP  Perm Area 33   Comms   vA v  Ethernet  Perm Area 35   Field IO vA v  Perm Area 36   Passwords V4  Perm Area 37   View Status v v  via Web  Page  Perm Area 39   Full Control vA v  via Web  Page                            110    43 TV 25 30 Iss 2 GLO June 06 UK       Default Password Access    Default password access is set up within the recorder and can be changed by the Adminis   trator or the Administrator can assign another user to change the access permissions     Default permissions    Administrator Access is for the Administrator level only    Engineer Access is for Engineers and above  Administrator level   e Supervisor Access is for Supervisors and above  incl  Engineer and Administrator levels       Technician Access is for Technicians and above  incl  Supervisor  Engineer and Adminis   trator levels       Operator Access is for Operators and above  incl  Technicians  Supervisors  Engineers  and Administrator leve
195. ls scone  lay 06 15 May 06 15 May 06 5 May     1978      General  f  a SEP e CE      Pens    0 00 Pen 49      Alarms ee te ES Web page   Engineering access      Hardware con  0 74       View Status   Permission Area 37  0 12      Sa ne       Full Control   Permission Area 39      moi nes        Remote Viewer Pen 51             Info   i       sumon   C _     Sats   N    Website Take Control             118 43 TV 25 30 Iss 2 GLO June 06 UK    Section 6  Screen Configuration    Process Screen Overview          Figure 6 1 Minitrend QX Process Screen  Standard Screen example   Chart and DPM    Recording menu allows                        Message Count menu allows quick access to      Batch  User Mark on Chart  and Messages Detail    stop start recording    e scheduled downloads  cea         E      e immediate download Batch Mark Detail Exit  of recorded data    View Alarms Modify Replay List of Cycles through    screen chart available available screens  layouts history screens            Alarm Status   Configure   Individual Alarm  Acknowledge       Acknowledge  all Alarms             il  ls    Prey Nex             ES    View Detail    Exit        Ack Exit             Enter recorder  Setup menu    Recorder ID No   amp  Name   alternates to display the  Screen Name     0001 Turbine 1             Pen 1  61 26       Time and Date       Pen 2    69 00    Pen 3  26 00 al                   Chart Area  Yellow area shows    when Pen 1 wasin  alarm state             Realtime Pen Pointers  
196. m rate  in Hertz  if this has been set up to change when the  pen goes into an active alarm state  A tick denotes if it is enabled and a star will indicate the    current log rate    Log Rate    Alarm Rate    No Group  No Group  No Group  No Group  No Group  No Group  No Group  No Group  No Group  No Group            Group   Displays the name of the group that this pen has been assigned to     Go Back to return to the previous screen or select Print to print the screen     Diagnostics     Main Menu  gt  Status  gt  Diagnostics     Complete diagnostics is shown for each of the following categories     Analogue In     Main Menu  gt  Status  gt  Diagnostics  gt  Analogue In     43 TV 25 30 Iss 2 GLO June 06 UK    101      Analogue Input Statu     Channel Input Range Cal Sample Rate   Sqrt   Sensor comp   Pen   CIC  A1    O 71 mv Type J  50mV  Factory Z2Hz S500ms     None 28      amp  2 2  4  0 01 mY Type T  25mV  Factory 2Hz  500ms  Dual 28     A3 4  0 02V  12 Factory 2Hz  500ms  Dual  adi     0 02Y  124 Factory 2Hz  500ms  None        amp 6 6    0 02    124 Factory 2Hz  500ms   Ar  0 02V  12 Factory 2Hz  500ms   AB  8   0 024  124 Factory 2H2  500ms     None  None  None    x   x   x  MS  0 02V  12 Factory 2H2 S00ms     None   x   x   x             e Channel   Displays the Slot position eg  A  B  or C  D  E  F  the Analogue Input number and  the system channel position  This will show a tick if this channel is enabled        Input   Displays the current Analogue Input reading fo
197. me Modbus masters may require an offset of 1 for example instead of entering  1800 enter 1801     Totalisers    Totaliser values in engineering units  4 byte IEEE floats using 2 Modbus registers per  reading     Input Text message    This facility allows a text message to be passed to the recorder to be annotated on the  chart and added to the message log  The maximum length of the message is 32 bytes of  ASCII characters  which need not be null terminated     It operates by utilising modbus function code 16  0x10   Preset Multiple registers  and the  unique address 0x0004 in the modbus global register map  Table A 1     The modbus message format follows that shown in section 3 7 of the document cited   The Start Address will be 00 04  and the Byte Count of the number of bytes in the follow   ing text message  As 2 modbus registers are used to pass an address to function 16  the  Number of Addresses has to be back calculated from the required Byte Count to give the  lowest integer such that  Number of Addresses    2  gt    Byte Count  For example if Byte  Count   4  then Number of Addresses   2  but if Byte Count   5  Number of Addresses    3     As an example  to send the 5 character message Start to a slave address 02 the com   plete message would be        Address    Slave Function Byte  Code Count    Start   Start No No  Addr    Addr    Addr    Addr  Data CRC   CRC    High   Low   High Lo          02          10 00 04 00 03 05 53   74   61   72   74   CRC   CRC           
198. mits are 20V to 50V DC   Also accepts 20 to  30V AC  Power to the D C variant is connected via a rectangular 3 way connector as iden   tified in Figure 2 3 on page 13 for the Minitrend QX and Figure 2 4 on page 74 for the  Multitrend SX     Wire seal provision    Earth screw       AC supply  eum  100   250 VAC  24V DC AC Input  SPNC Relay  Analogue Input    Analogue Output 24V TX  or Pulse Input Power  Slot A Supply  Slot B Output  Alarm Relay or 5 CJC Sensor  Digital I O  Slot G Ethernet  RS48  USB Host       Figure 2 3 QX Connector diagram    43 TV 25 30 Iss 2 GLO June 06 UK 13    Electrical Installation                                                                                                                   Card and Slot positions  Table 2 1   Card priority positions  Cards Minitrend QX Multitrend SX  Analogue Input card A B A  B  C  D  E  F  Analogue Output card B E F  Pulse Input card A B A  B  C  D  E  F  Alarm Relay or Digital I O card G G  H     AC supply  100   250 VAC  Earth screw Analogue Input    ground  Analogue Output   or Pulse Input  24V DC AC Input Slot A  Slot B  Slot C  SPN  Relay Slot D  Slot E  Slot F  24V TX  Pawel Supply Alarm Relay  Output Gi  LED Digital I O  Slot G  CJC Sensor Slot H  position in the  middle of the on  Analogue Input  connector   Ethernet  Slots     F    14       Figure 2 4 SX Rear panel    43 TV 25 30 Iss 2 GLO June 06 UK    Electrical Installation    Analogue Input Card    Each Analogue Input card has up to 8 input channels
199. n be restored at any time     User Cal   User calibration can be applied at any time  To meet the accuracy values spec   ified  see    Input Range Performance Accuracy Table    on page 177    calibration  source should be accurate to 0 01  full scale or better     43 TV 25 30 Iss 2 GLO June 06 UK 71    72    On initial power up the Factory Cal and the User Cal are the same     SAI Calibration Calibrate AI Slot A  Cie   rne Ja  2  2 eee     Coa  ololsislelelsis     os Use Factory Settings          8 Use User Settings      Recalibrate  a su    The Al Calibration menu displays a button for each Analogue Input card fitted        e Select the desired slot button and select the Range required to be calibrated from the drop  down list eg    50V     e Each card has channels numbered 1 to 8  Underneath each channel is the type of calibra   tion     e Select the button below the corresponding channel number and select the type of calibration  from the list  in this case Recalibrate  The Recalibrate icon will appear under that channel     Table 4 4   Analogue In Calibration       Calibration Type          Factory       User       Recalibrate       Recalibrate All       Factory All       lel elie                e The Calibration Positive Range box appears with instructions to connect the top limit of the  input range  Once this is done press the Calibrate button  Next  the Calibration Negative  Range box appears instructing the user to apply the bottom range limit  When this is done  pre
200. n levels  that will allow access to specific areas of the recorder menu system  The names of these  levels can be edited here       Pwds Enable   Tick to enable the password menu     Level 0 Name   Administrator  Highest permission level   e Level 1 Name   Engineer  Second highest permission level  e Level 2 Name   Supervisor  Third highest permission level    Level 3 Name   Technician  Fourth highest permission level    Level 4 Name   Operator  Fifth highest permission level       Unrestrict   allows the Administrator to de restrict access to certain areas so menus will be  available even without logging in       Menu Timeout Enable   Tick to activate the timeout facility to be enabled on the menus    This is always enabled for ESS        Menu Timeout   Set a specific time period of inactivity in a password protected area  before logging out   20 to 3600 seconds       Web Timeout Enable   Tick to activate the timeout facility to be enabled on the web page    This is always enabled for ESS        Web Timeout   Set a specific time period of inactivity in the web page before logging out   Enter the time in seconds   20 to 3600 seconds       Old Passwords   Select how many previously used passwords are locked from use as a  new password   Max 12 previous passwords  0 for disabled  Cannot be disabled for ESS  recorders          Username Max   Set the maximum amount of characters that can be used for the User  name login   1 to 20 characters  4 to 20 for ESS recorders     e Passwo
201. n method  if any  e how the sending device will indicate that it has finished sending a message    e how the receiving device will indicate that it has received a message    The following Protocols available are     Modbus    Modbus primarily sends data  no setup information is transferred via Ethernet or RS485  ports  The device ID and Serial number is held in the setup and this information is required  to locate the correct device in TrendServer     A Modbus Profile Tool runs in the background and a selection of profiles are displayed in  the dialog box  not required for V4 or V5 devices      Modbus only requires the correct Slave Address to connect  see    Modbus    on page 62  If  the device is on the Recorder ID and Serial Number will be transferred  if the device is not  on an extra device will appear in the database containing the Realtime data     Only data can be sent via Modbus  No recorder setups or events are sent for realtime and  logged data     However  a Modbus interface  such as Modscan 32  can be set up as Modbus master and  used to transmit Totals  Digital Input  Digital Output  a Comms Variable  CV  or Messages  to the recorder    Modbus X    Modbus X protocol differs from standard Modbus by the reversed byte order of the floating  point number     The Comms Server provides an integrated facility for testing a device to help decide which  modbus protocol variant to use  See    Edit a Device    on page 1517     Modbus Mapping and Function Codes  See    Appe
202. nd sys   tem configuration time  It also means that you can add devices without shutting down exist   ing systems     OPC offers the following     Combine different devices from different manufacturers in one system       Reduce installation time    43 TV 25 30 Iss 2 GLO June 06 UK 141    142    Comms and Trend Manager Pro Suite    e Add devices without stopping existing software and systems   e Quickly replace a device from one vendor with one from another   e Share information around networks   e Device drivers rendered obsolete   e Factory  laboratory and office applications can all access the same data    e Reliable data as any number of OPC software applications can simultaneously read  a device    e Single  industry standard  data interface    OPC Clients    An OPC client can be used instead of the TrendServer software  It is a user software appli   cation for realtime interface between servers and clients  Information from our comms  server  which is OPC compliant  uses an industry standard method of uniform data inter   change  The OPC client can then export realtime communications to other applications  eg   Microsoft    Excel     Web Browser    The Web Browse function can be enabled disabled from the recorder  The web button can  be password protected if passwords are enabled  See    Web    on page 63     To access the web page  type the device   s IP address in to a web browser such as Internet  Explorer  If Microsoft    WINS system  Windows Internet Name Service  
203. ndix J  Function Codes and Memory Maps    on page 215     43 TV 25 30 Iss 2 GLO June 06 UK    Comms and Trend Manager Pro Suite    USB Barcode Reader    USB ports allow the use of a USB barcode reader     Comms and Trend Manager Pro Suite    TrendServer software is required to set up and run communications to and from the de   vices and the PC software    TrendServer is part of the TrendManager Pro Suite complete with its own Communi   cations Server function  TrendServer is a fully network aware package which allows data  viewing  archiving and communication over Ethernet and RS485  Ethernet can provide com   munications limited only by PC resources  and RS485 can provide comms for up to 31 de   vices  Included as standard is the ability to e mail  graph  print and export data  Device data  can be entered into any PC on the LAN  Local Area Networks  and automatically viewed and  graphed at any other PC on the LAN     TrendServer offers the ability to download and import data communicating using FTP  File  Transfer Protocol  via the Ethernet Interface  To use it you must have a device and a Com   ms card with Ethernet and the FTP option installed     One of the unique features of the TrendServer software is the Realtime facility in con   junction with the Communications Server  Realtime data can be retrieved from the device  to a PC via an Ethernet and or RS485 connection  This data can be viewed  graphed and  logged into the system  Data from the device can be logged to a da
204. ng  adjustable for panel thickness of 2mm to 20mm  Adapter kits available for covering existing panel  cutouts        Dimensions    QX Recorder   W  144mm  5 67      H  144mm  5 67      D  200mm  7 87      Additional 80mm  3 15      clearance recommended for a straight type power cable and signal connectors  Cutout 138 x  138mm  5 43 x 5 43       SX Recorder   W  288mm  11 34      H  288mm  11 34   D  200mm  7 87      Additional 830mm   3 15     clearance recommended for a straight type power cable and signal connectors  Cutout  281 x 281mm  11 06 x 11 06           Weight    QX Recorder   2 7 Kg  6lb  max   SX Recorder   10 Kg  22 Ib  max        Colour    Bezel  Black       Wiring Connections       IEC Power Plug  Removable terminal strip for input and alarm connections       176    43 TV 25 30 Iss 2 GLO June 06 UK       Specification Tables    Input Range Performance Accuracy Table                                                                                           Input Actuation is Le Temp  Input   Linear  g y Stability       Impedance  Millivolts DC  5 to 5   10 to 10      0 2  F S  0 01     C  gt 10M ohms   25 to 25   50 to 50   100 to 100      0 1  F S  0 01     C  gt 10M ohms   250 to 250   500 to 500   1000 to 1000     0 1  F S  0 01     C  gt 10M ohms  Volts DC  0 3 to 0 3   0 6 to 0 6   1 5 to 1 5      0 1  F S  0 01     C  gt 1M ohms   3 to 3   6 to 6   12 to 12      0 1  F S  0 01     C  gt 1M ohms   25 to 25   50 to 50     0 1  F S  0 01     C  gt 1M ohms  M
205. ng of data with com   munications to the recorder  It supports all the capabilities of TrendManager Pro plus real time data  acquisition  FTP  file transfer protocol  and web browser access  TrendServer Pro provides secure  multi level  multi user access to the recorder data by various departments with security  Standard fea   tures of TrendServer Pro include data archive tools E mail set up and alarming  graphing  print im   port and export data facilities     TrendManager Pro with OPC Server   provides the same functions as the TrendServer Pro but  includes the added function of an integrated OPC Server to allow easy interfacing to third party HMI  software packages that support an OPC Client  This provides a real time interface between servers  and clients     Database Management Tool   Database Management Tool   this software application works with TrendManager Pro and  TrendServer Pro to provide safe administration of data with tools to archive  sort  move  copy and  delete the data stored in local and remote databases    The Database Management Tool software is supplied with TrendServer Pro    X Series Screen Designer   X Series Screen Designer   is a separate software package that enables the user to design unique  display layouts for transfer to the recorder   s screen  Screen layouts can be created using any combi   nation of indicators such as Trending Charts  Digital Panel Meters  DPM  and Bar graphs  Flexibility  allows each type of indicator to have elements of i
206. nout   Only available when Type is set to TC  Toggle between  Upscale and Downscale Burnout     TC Type   Only available when Type is set to TC  Select this for a list of  available TC types     CJ Comp   Only available when Type is set to TC  Select this for a list of  available CJ Compensation         Int Automatic   Uses the cold junction sensor in the recorder as a variable ref   erence temperature       Ext 0 Deg C   Assumes the cold junction is held at 0   C to provide a OmV refer   ence  external to the recorder         Ext with Spec Temp   Uses a reference junction held at a constant tempera   ture  Specify the temperature that the cold junction sensor is to be set at     e   Ext Input   Use a thermocouple or resistance thermometer from another chan   nel to measure the cold junction sensor    External Input   Only available when CJ Compensation is set to Ext Input   Select the input required as an external input     Use Pen Scale   Toggle On and Off  this is enabled by default  Analogue    defaults to the corresponding Pen    eg  A1 will default to Pen 1  If you  change A1 to display another pen scale eg Pen 3  you must go into Pen 3  and change the maths to A1  This will ensure that Pen Scale 3 will display  A1 input  With this enabled the Engineering zero and span is the same as  the pen scale  Disable this and the Engineering zero and span will not  reflect the pen scale     Eng  Span    Ohms  Volts and Amps only   Only available when not using     Use Pen Scale  
207. nputs per board  frequency     1Hz to 25kHz  updated once per sec   Input  Low  lt  1V  High  gt 4V to  lt 50V or Volt free input  Low   short circuit  High   open circuit        Alarm Outputs  optional  Programmable alarm set points  6 per pen  can be configured to activate up to 16 outputs for the QX    Recorder and 48 outputs for the SX Recorder  Update rate  200 ms for all alarms  Number Type   e 4 or 8 relay contacts SPDT  3A 240VAC  3A 24VAC DC  0 2A 240VDC  non inductive  inter   nally suppressed   e 8 I O or 16  O  SPNO 1A 24VDC  non inductive  internally suppressed   Activation  Fully programmable internal alarm levels  Assignable to any relay or discrete output        Digital Input Output 8 I O or 16 I O  all channels may be selected freely as either digital inputs or outputs    The Digital I O card also has 4 channels that can be set as pulse inputs  channels 1 to 4   The operat   ing frequency for pulse inputs on the Digital I O card is 1kHz max    4 relay outputs  all four channels are relay outputs only    8 relays  2 DI card  two outputs can be configured for use as digital inputs  A digital input is provided  by a volt free contact between the normally open  NO  and the common  C  terminals of an output    relay  If the 2 Digital inputs are used only 6 relay outputs are available        Custom Screens  optional  Provides the capability in the recorder to accept custom screen designs from the Screen Designer        OPC Server  optional  OPC 3 0 DA compliant  To
208. o channel and channel to re   corder  Digital I O channels will provide isolation to 100V AC test voltage  not for mains con   nection      The Multitrend SX recorder has three available expansion slots for Digital Input Alarm Re   lay output cards     Inputs are automatically debounced to remove switching oscillations  All Digital Inputs are  volt free contacts  and are sampled at 10Hz max     Alarm Relay Output Card Options  There are two card options  split into two types     4 Channel Alarm Card  120 240 VAC 3 Amps rated  resistive load   The relay contacts are form C  NO  NC  and  includes suppression    8 Channel Alarm Card    120 240V AC 3 Amps rated  resistive load   Two channels on the 8 Alarm card  can be used  as digital inputs  The relay contacts are form C  NO  NC  and includes suppression  The 8   amp  2 Alarm Relay card  this 8 channel card will have 8 mains rated relays  of which 2 of the  8 channels can be configured for use as digital inputs     43 TV 25 30 Iss 2 GLO June 06 UK    Alarm Digital Input Specification    Latched or Single Pulse    The relay outputs can be set by the user to be either Latched or Single Pulse     Latched    A latched relay will maintain in its active state until the trigger source has returned to a non  alarmed state  or a second Event has been activated to disable the relay     Single Pulse    The relay will go active for a period of time  specified by the user  then return to a non active  state  The time out period remains inde
209. o the Fo or Po sterilisation  function  at 250   F  121 11  C   The Standard Reference Temperature and Thermal  Resistance  Z Value  are adjustable  All temperature limits are adjustable   Start temp  Reference temp and Z factor are all user defined  allowing sup   port for many different types of sterilisation applications  See    Sterilisa   tion    on page 59    Tag   Select and enter an identifier for the pen  Up to 17 characters     Add to Msgs   Toggles On and Off  Select this to add a totaliser to the  messages screen  Eg  Total1  Total 1 Reset    Units   Normal Totaliser only  This is the Units of Measurement for the total   iser  Select and enter the units  Up to 12 characters     Time Factor   Normal Totaliser only  The normal totaliser units are divided  by the time factor     Unit Factor   Normal Totaliser only  This is the totalising factor for the con   version from pen input units to a totaliser value  The normal totaliser units  are multiplied by the unit factor     No Backflow   Normal Totaliser only  If the flow reading should go into a  negative value  eg  The flow meter has been switched off  and    No Back   flow    is inactive  the totaliser will subtract from the total value  When    No  Backflow    is active any negative values are ignored and the total value is  held while the flow meter is off until the backflow level is exceeded     Backflow Level   Only active when No Backflow is set  Set the level at  which totalising will stop if the signal flow 
210. ogue Input            General Menu     Main Menu  gt  Configure  gt  Setup  gt  Edit Setup  gt  General   From this screen select the buttons required for General recorder configuration        Select a button to take you to the next menu    e Ident   Unique recorder information  Name  Description and ID  See     Ident    on page 69    e Localisation   Set up the recorder for native language use and global set   tings  See    Localisation    on page 69    68 43 TV 25 30 Iss 2 GLO June 06 UK    e Factory   This menu contains Credits  for activating recorder options    Firmware Upgrade  Calibration  Demo Traces  Reset Setup and Produc   tion  See    Factory    on page 70    e Batch   The Batch menu is for entering the Batch requirements for starting  a new batch  including using a Barcode reader     Batch Menu    on  page 74     e Printer   The Printer menu allows configuration for setting up a printer  See     Printer Menu    on page 75     e Groups   Groups of Pens can be specified and named with a Group name  or number  See    Groups    on page 75     When the configuration is complete select the Finish button to Commit  Discard or Commit  Later  Select the Back button to return to the previous menu     Ident   Main Menu  gt  Configure  gt  Setup  gt  Edit Setup gt  General  gt  Ident     Unique recorder information      Name   Enter the recorder   s name  Maximum characters 32    e Description   Enter a description for the recorder using the on screen key   board  Maximum ch
211. ommenting out code to try different things  for example    if  A1  gt  10       return 9      i  else    return 20          return A1     Here the else statement is  commented out  so it won t be included but can easily be re in   troduced if required     Maths Error Messages    When the Maths functionality is processing through the scrips you have written it will carry  out Syntax and other checks  When it comes across operations  functions  brackets  etc   not expected or permitted it will report an error  However  the fault being reported may be  on a previous line caused by the missing or incorrect function     43 TV 25 30 Iss 2 GLO June 06 UK 195       196 43 TV 25 30 Iss 2 GLO June 06 UK    Appendix C  Thermocouple Connections    How Thermocouples work    Thermocouples produce a voltage dependant upon the temperature gradient between the  hot and cold junctions  The hot junction is the measuring junction of the thermocouple  the  cold junction is the point where the thermocouple wires are connected  usually the connec   tion block on the back of the recorder                       20  C  100  C E       o CJC  Hot Junction Cold  Junction                   If the hot  measuring  junction is at 100   C and the connection block of the recorder is at 20  C  the thermocouple will produce a voltage corresponding to 80  C  the difference between the  hot and cold junctions    For the recorder to correctly report the 100  C it needs to know the temperature at the cold  junction  
212. on page 173  Pro   longed operation at temperatures over 50   C will accelerate degradation of the display  backlight     If the unit has been moved from a cold environment into a warm one  ensure that the  unit has reached a minimum temperature of 12   C or is left to stand for 1 hour at room  temperature before applying power  to ensure no condensation remains in the unit     Touch Screen    Care should be taken with the touch screen when handling the unit  Sharp and hard  objects may pierce the touch screen and damage the display  Only use the stylus pro   vided for screen selection     Clean the screen using a suitable touch screen cleaner  Abrasive materials will dam   age the touch screen     Protective Screen covers are available to provide additional protection against abrasive  materials  See    Section 10  Spares List    on page 157     43 TV 25 30 Iss 2 GLO June 06 UK 167    Calibration    It is recommended that Recorder calibration is checked at least every year  or in accord   ance with your industry regulations  to ensure maximum accuracy  See    Calibration    on  page 71        168 43 TV 25 30 Iss 2 GLO June 06 UK    Section 12  Technical Data  amp  Specifications    Field 10 Specification    Analogue Output    Each recorder is capable of supporting analogue output function  The AO card is available  as a 2 or 4 channel option  and will plug into any of the analogue input slots     Analogue Outputs are used to support     Re transmission of Analogue Input valu
213. on to Commit  Select the Back but   ton to return to the previous menu   Levels   Main Menu  gt  Configure  gt  Passwords  gt  User Admin  gt  Levels     The Level permissions are the 4 user levels that have been set up and named in the Policy  menu eg  Engineer  Supervisor  Technician and Operator     Select each user level eg  Engineer  and setup the permission areas for that particular level  of user  Each Permission Area will give the user access to selected menus in the recorder   The level permissions has a set of default settings that are defined in    Level Permissions     on page 109  Permission areas can be customised for each level if required  see    Users     on page 82     Add User     Main Menu  gt  Configure  gt  Passwords  gt  User Admin  gt  Add User     The Administrator enters each new user name  then selects the new user and assigns their  Level of permissions  The Administrator can set up a new user but cannot assign a pass   word  A dummy password is set and the new user is prompted to change the password  when they first Log on     The same user name cannot be used  User names must not contain numeric characters     The Administrator can add more than one user at a time  They will not be added until the  configuration has been Committed  When the configuration is complete select the Finish  button to Commit     When a new user is added a default password     password     is set  When a new user first  logs on they are prompted to change the password  T
214. ons  DNS   Domain Name Sys   tem  WINS   Windows Internet Name Service  MDNS   Managed Data Network Services     e Auto DNS   This is a sub menu for DNS WINS MDNS  Toggles On and Off     e Pri  DNS Address   This is a sub menu for DNS WINS MDNS  Only availa   ble when Auto DNS is deactivated     e Sec  DNS Address   This is a sub menu for DNS WINS MDNS  Only avail   able when Auto DNS is deactivated     e Auto WINS   This is a sub menu for DNS WINS MDNS  Toggles On and  Off     e Pri  WINS Address   This is a sub menu for DNS WINS MDNS  Only avail   able when Auto WINS is deactivated     e Sec  WINS Address   This is a sub menu for DNS WINS MDNS  Only  available when Auto WINS is deactivated     e Auto MDNS   This is a sub menu for DNS WINS MDNS  Toggles On and  Off     When the setup is complete go back to the TCP IP menu and complete the Comms setup     Ports   Main Menu  gt  Configure  gt  Setup  gt  Edit Setup  gt  Comms  gt  TCP IP  gt  Ports     The port numbers are associated with the IT system in use  Port numbers are set to a default  but can be changed by the user to allow data traffic to use a specified port     e HTTP   HyperText Transport Protocol is the communications protocol that  enables Web browsing  Select and enter the desired port number if  required     e FTP Data     File Transfer Protocol port for transferring data  Select and  enter the desired port number if required     e FTP Control     File Transfer Protocol  Select and enter the desired port  num
215. oo    eeeceseseseseeeeeeeeeeeeees  Mounting and Viewing Angles        sss  Panel Mounting on  ee eeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeteteeeeeees  Panel Mounting Clamp Installation                      220       Panel cut out size o eeceeceeeceseseseseseseeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeneneees 6  Media Diagnostics Lise 104  Memory Maps and Function Codes             215  Menu Bar eur rames   ST E N E A S  Menu PONS a neo  Message Format   0 0 0 0   Message List    sssrin  Message Types   AlarMS oaea e a E O RN EEN   Ala RS Rd te   DIASNOSTICS  suiriri i kaaa a Ea   Security we   System we   USSR satin  Messages Menu   Alarm Messages oT   All Messages ou      Diagnostics Messages              Messages Format   Messages List             P   Messages Types ou    eee   Security Messages   System Messages   User Messages aroe heia rN  Messages Types    sssri  Modbus ne ceneitnss  Modbus Function Codes A  Modbus  COMMS  viicceccecceccessesscesseseeeee    Mounting and Viewing Angles              N  Network Settings   COMMS Server                                                         144  O  Operating Temperature u    167  Options rames   Hardware                Overview PE   COMMS       eee   Data Storage             Display    oeeie   Options  Hardware   QX Standard Screens              Recorder Functionality  Remote Control Viewer  SX Standard Screens             SOCULILY serres  USB Devices msn    43 TV 25 30 Iss 2 GLO June 06 UK    P    Panel Mounting sm 10  Panel cut out size reines 6  Password Policy nue arr
216. ools back to the start temperature  in this example 100   C  and so the  contribution under the curve up to t   22 minutes would be included in the reported  Fo  The final Fo value might then be 16 1  say  with 15 having been achieved up to t    20 minutes  and the extra 1 1 having accumulated during the cooling back to 100   C  between t   20 minutes and t   22 minutes     The terms used in setting up the Fo totaliser  together with their default values  are summa   rised in this table                             Term Definition Default Allowed  values Range  The equivalent time in minutes at 121 11  C that would pro   Fo duce the same degree of sterilisation  This is the totaliser out   put value  The temperature increase in   C above the reference tempera  10 5   20  z factor ture that will produce a 10 fold increase in the rate of sterilisa   tion  Start The temperature in   C above which the contributions to FO 100 90   120  temperature can be counted  Reference The reference temperature for sterilisation  normally 121 112C  Temperature 121 11  C  can be altered if required   If TRUE  contributions to Fg can be included after the target FALSE    Include value has been reached and while the temperature is still  cooling phase   above the start temperature  If FALSE  these contributions are  not included    The maximum Fo totaliser value can be set if    Include 15 1   999  Completion   as  cooling phase    is not selected  the totaliser will stop at  Value    this value o
217. or Ethernet  and select Add Device from the resulting menu     3  Select a Comms port and right click in a blank space in the top window and select Add  Device from the resulting menu     All these methods will produce the Add Device Details box  Areas of the box become greyed  out as the selections are made     nm    Device Details   Add Device Details    Protocol Modbus   ue    Profile Name    Communications Port       IP Address    Slave ID       Recorder Name    Status    Active C Inactive    Socket  Test    Cancel       Protocol   For active Modbus devices  the recorder name and protocol variant can be  changed  modbus vs Modbus X   For an inactive Modbus device the device profile can also  be changed     Profile Name   The system creates Modbus profiles from an imported setup or logged data  and creates a profile including information for pen  scale  units etc  If the Profile Name win   dow is empty it means that no setup or data has been imported into Comms server  The pro   file Name is made up from the Recorder name  Type and ID number  Once the setup or data  has been imported it will display in this window  no need to restart Comms Server     Communications Port   Choose between Ethernet or RS485 for COM ports 1 to 8  This  may already be entered depending on how you have chosen to add the device     IP Address   Go to Main Menu  gt  Status  gt  System  gt  General  In this list is the recorder IP  Address    Slave ID   This is a unique Modbus ID Address used by th
218. ort using  the Scheduled option  See    Recording Menu    on page 90     If the Time Left button shows two green arrows this means that the memory  buffer is full and the oldest data has started to be overwritten   Messages  78     This button produces another button bar for quick access  The number displayed is the  number of new messages that have been registered since the menu was last checked     Select this to produce another button bar with access to     e Batch   Shortcut to enter details to start a new batch or to control a batch that has already  been started  See    Batch Setup Batch Control    on page 87        Mark on Chart   There is a Mark button to enter a Mark on Chart     Message Detail   Press this button for quick access to the Messages screen  where each    message is put into a category or All Messages can be viewed  See    Messages Menu     on page 92     43 TV 25 30 Iss 2 GLO June 06 UK    Screen    The Screen button produces the Screen menu bar       s Previous and Next buttons  Map Snap Expert Exit scroll back and forth  through the screen list          Figure 6 2 Screen Menu bar           tl  lt i  a gt      Edit Replay List Prev Next Exit        3    Screen Menu Bar             e Edit   Quick access to channel mapping  Map channels to pens  switch between Expert  and non expert mode to select widgets or objects  See Edit below       Replay   Gives quick access to the Replay Screen  See    Replay    on page 86     List   List of all available screens
219. ot between pins on achannel  300V AC is permitted at Measurement Category CAT  Il  Overvoltage Category Il     Failure to comply with these instructions could result in death or serious injury     NOTICE    For 12 and 24 way connectors  torque setting 0 4 Nm 3 5lbf in  Do not over tighten   Recommended wire size for termination connector is 22 12 AWG  22 14 SWG        Analogue Input Channel Numbers    Analogue Input cards are either 4  6 or 8 channels with a full length connector taking up 8  channels even if only 4 or 6 are operational                 Table 2 2    Analogue Input card  Card Slot A Slot B Slot C Slot D Slot E Slot F  Position  Channel 1 to 8 9 to 16 17 to 24 25 to 32 33 to 40 41 to 48  number                               43 TV 25 30 Iss 2 GLO June 06 UK 15    Electrical Installation    Analogue Input Connection Details    Current Input    For Current  mA  Input fit a 10   resistor across the   and   pins of the 12 way mating half  analogue connector  Figure 2 6 on page 16 shows a 1002   0 1   resistor fitted to chan   nel 5 for a current  mA  input     Thermocouples    Ensure polarity of thermocouple is correct     Resistance Thermometers    If using 2 or 3 wire R T the   and   terminals must be linked together  See Figure 2 6 on  page 16     Analogue Input Signal Wiring    Figure 2 5 Analogue Input connector                                                                         2 314 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 a 3116 17 18  19 20 21   24  EEIE H  CLL   me sms         
220. ot then     BLKV1 1  Set flag to show that A3 has just exceeded A2  BLKV2 BLKV2 1  Increment the change counter by 1  Return BLKV2  Return the new change counter total       else If A3 is not bigger than A2     BLKV1 0  Set flag to show A2 is bigger than A3 this time  Return BLKV2  Return current change counter         With script above  BLKV  all Variables  are used to maintain values  It should be noted that  BLKV   s do not persist over a power removal  and if the application were to require a non   volatile count  then BLKVn should be substituted with PSTVn     Example 3    The application described in Examples 2 and 3 is to be extended to totalise the amount of  time that Input 1 is the highest of 1  2 3  amp  4     Again scripting can be used to easily solve this requirement   The Pseudo code is written as  If input 1 is indicated as the current highest value  then display the timer     If input 1 is not the highest input value  then stop totalising time and return the current timer  value     We know that in Example 1  the highest value channel number is contained with GLBV1   and as this is a global variable it is also accessible from this script     if  GLBV1  1  Tests if the global variable 1 is equal to channel 1       43 TV 25 30 Iss 2 GLO June 06 UK 193    Full Maths  amp  Script Processing    BLKV1 trun 1  0   If it is then keep the timer running without resetting  return tget 1   Return the current timer value       else If not then       BLKV1 tpause 1   Pause
221. pen    Maths   Displays any Maths calculation applied to this pen or the Analogue Input channel  for this pen  Summarised to M for any Maths expressions     Scale   Displays the High and Low limits of the scale range for this pen   In Alarm   Displays the current status of the alarm  tick   active and a cross   inactive   Pen Rate   This displays the fastest of all dependencies   Alarm   Displays how many alarms are enabled on this pen   Total   This will be ticked if a totaliser has been enabled on this pen    Group   Displays the group number if this pen has been allocated to a group     Go Back to return to the previous screen or select Print to print the screen     Maintenance     Main Menu  gt  Status  gt  Maintenance     The recorder keeps track of important    life actions    for improved diagnostics and preventa   tive maintenance notification     Health Watch Maintenance is available as a firmware option  To enable this go to Options  in    Options    on page 97     Maintenance      Item   Value      Powered on 56 times   Last powered up Tue May 02 08 37 22  Internal Mem Id 128T16   Time on since powerup 4h 56m 51s    Total On time 48d 8h 52m 15s   Total OFF time Sd 19h 31m 04s   Longest Off time 2d 22h 59m 03s   Lithium cell life 29861 hours left   Backlight Life 54289 hours left at full br     Compact Flash 27 inserts   Lowest temperature 22 0 Deg C   Highest temperature 32 0 Deg C       Once enabled this screen will keep the following information     Powered on   
222. pen  else    Z will occur   Note 1    Events 6 Events is a firmware option that can be activated using the credit system  Events are certain con   ditions or operations which can be set up and logged according to the time and date of the occur   rence  Events can be used to trigger other effects  Subsequently events can be reviewed in a list  or represented on a graph    Fast Scanning mode 5 For fast processes  the scan rate and recording of the data can be set for up to 50 times per sec   ond  20ms  for up to 8 inputs for the QX and 16 inputs for the SX    Totalisers  4 Each pen can be associated with a totaliser  Using extra pens  the totalised values can be dis    Sterilisation played and recorded  multiple totals can be calculated out of the same variable  weekly  monthly    calculation etc    The totaliser function can handle Fo and Po sterilisation calculation   Note 1    Custom Screens 4 Import custom built screens that have been created in Screen Designer   Note 2    Health Watch  2 The recorder keeps track of important    life actions    for improved diagnostics and preventative   Maintenance maintenance notification  Including Power cycles  Last powered up  Total On time  Total Off time   Longest off time  Battery life left  Backlight life left at 100  brightness  Compact Flash insertions   Hi Lo CJC value  Hi  amp  Lo temps   Analogue In last factory user cal  Relay operations    Print Support 2 Enables the printer option to print from various screens using a basic
223. pendent of the length of time the active state re   mains     Single Pulse Relay Settings    User can specify Pulse length in seconds from 0 1  100ms  to 6480  108 minutes  in 0 1 sec   ond increments     Fail Safe    Each relay channel can be independently selected with the fail safe option  This will invert  the state of the relay output  With Failsafe Off normally open  NO  relays have open contacts  when the power is off  and open contacts when there is no active alarm  The contacts will  close when an associated alarm goes active  With Failsafe On  normally open relays have  closed contacts when the recorder is powered on and there are no open active alarms  and  the contacts open with an alarm active or when the power is removed  See    Failsafe Relay  Positions    on page 172     Relay Output Specification    The Minitrend QX recorder will provide the ability to have at least 1 relay output for each  analogue input  i e  16   Multitrend SX recorder will also provide at least one relay output  for each analogue input  i e  48   there are three available slots for Digital inputs  Relay Out   puts     Common Alarm Output  standard     The common alarm output include a single    common    alarm relay on the power board  This  relay is the same rating as those on the 8  amp  16 Digital I O cards  This relay is NC  normally  closed  and can be activated by any alarm  This relay will close when power is removed   This relay is identified as    Fixed    in the relay output pic
224. perating the contents of the brackets   Next step will be either elseif or else    Must always finish with a return    If  x gt 5        return y          Else else Steps into brackets to run  Must always finish  with a return    else       return y          Elseif elseif x  Carries out a conditional test and if true steps  into brackets to run  Must always finish with a  return    elseif  x gt 4        return y          First run  FIRSTRUN  Returns true if the script is being run for the  first time  otherwise returns false                Set Changed  SETUP  Returns true if the setup has been changed   CHANGED  otherwise returns false       Time Changed  TIMECHANG   Returns true if the time has been changed  oth   ED  erwise returns false                   43 TV 25 30 Iss 2 GLO June 06 UK 189    Full Maths  amp  Script Processing    Full Maths    Full Maths functions provides a simple and intuitive method for the user to carry out numer   ous mathematical functions  Some examples are shown below    Table 14 8   Full Maths examples       Full Maths examples             P4 lo A1 A2  Pen 4 shows the result of the lowest of either  A1 or A2  P3  A1 A2  SQRT A3  Pen 3 shows the result of Analogue input 1    added to Analogue input 2  all multiplied by the  square root of Analogue input 3                P4 GLBV1 P4 shows the Global Variable 1       NOTICE    Please note    Pn     is not entered in the Maths Block and is assumed by the Recorder  e g  To enter the equation P2 A2  th
225. ptions Credits Enabled  Custom Screens 4 Y o x  Maintenance 2 Y oor x  Print Support 2 Y o x  Batch 3 Y o x  Groups 2 Y o x  Remote Viewer 3 Y o x  OPC Server 8 Y o x  Extra Pens 2 per 4 pens Total Pens   Password CFR NA Y o x  Total Credits no  used no  available                    Password CFR    ESS   Extended Security System   This will only appear in the list if this  feature is enabled in the recorder  It cannot be enabled by the firmware credit system   con   tact Honeywell for details     Go Back to return to the previous screen or select Print to print the screen     IO Cards   Main Menu  gt  Status  gt  System  gt  IO Cards     This will display the Slot position of each card in the recorder  The Card Type is identified  as Analogue I P  Alarm Digital I O  Analogue O P or Pulse Input  The number of Channels  on each card eg  Digital I O 1 16  The Firmware Version of the card is displayed and the  Board Revision     Table 4 8   Example of IO Card Status                   Slot Card Type Channels FW Version Board Revision  A Analogue l P 1 8 A  00  0  B Pulse 9 12 A  00  1  G Digital I O 1 16 A  00  0                         Go Back to return to the previous screen or select Print to print the screen     43 TV 25 30 Iss 2 GLO June 06 UK    Pen Overview     Main Menu  gt  Status  gt  Pen Overview     Each penis displayed with full configuration details     e    e    Pen   Displays the pen number and ticked if it is enabled  Value   Displays the current reading for this 
226. quarters  Phone    65  6355 2828  Fax    65  6445 3033    Australia   Honeywell Limited   Phone    61  2 9370 4500  FAX    61  2 9370 4525  Toll Free 1300 36 39 36  Toll Free Fax   1300 36 04 70    China     PRC   Beijing  Honeywell China Inc   Phone    86 10  8458 3280  Fax    86 10  8458 3102    China     PRC   Shanghai  Honeywell China Inc   Phone   86 21  6237 0237  Fax   86 21  6237 1237    China   Hong Kong S A R   Honeywell Ltd    Phone    852  2953 6412  Fax    852  2953 6767    China     PRC   Chengdu  Honeywell China Inc   Phone    86 28  6786 348  Fax    86 28  6787 061    China     PRC   Guangzhou  Honeywell China Inc   Phone    86 20  3879 1169  Fax    86 20  3879 1269    China     PRC   Shenzhen   Honeywell China Inc   Phone    86  755 518 1226  Fax    86  755 518 1221    Indonesia   Honeywell Indonesia   Pte Ltd    Phone    62  21 535 8833  FAX    62  21 5367 1008    IndiaTATA   Honeywell Ltd   Phone   91  20687 0445   0446  Fax    91  20681 2243  687  5992    Japan  Honeywell Inc    Phone    81  3 5440 1425  Fax    81  3 5440 1368       South Korea   Honeywell Korea Co Ltd   Phone    822  799 6167  Fax    822  792 9013    Malaysia   Honeywell Engineering  Sdn Bhd   Phone    60 3  7958 4988  Fax    60 3  7958 8922    New Zealand   Honeywell Limited  Phone    64 9  623 5050  Fax    64 9  623 5060  Toll Free  0800  202 088    Philippines   Honeywell Systems   Philippines  Inc    Phone    63 2  636 1661    1662   Fax    63 2  638 4013    Singapore   Honeywell Sout
227. r cal 4 6 Fri Oct OF 13 50 24 5132     Al last user cal 4 7 Fri Oct OF 13 50 24 5132     AI last user cal 4 8 Fri Oct 07 13 50 24 5132     Relay 1 cycles  6 cycle s     Relay 2 cycles  0 cyclefs   Relay 3 cycle s  0 cyclefs   Relay 4 cycles  0 cycle s   Fixed 0 cycleis   Last Setup Modified Mon May 22 14 03 11       e Relay   cycle s    Displays the amount of relay cycles per relay listed      Fixed   reports common relay output cycles    e Last Setup Modified   displays the last Day  Month and Time the setup was last modified   Go Back to return to the previous screen or select Print to print the screen     100 43 TV 25 30 Iss 2 GLO June 06 UK    Recording     Main Menu  gt  Status  gt  Recording      gt  Recording Status       14 46    25 36    49 92    Overrange  Overrange    Overrange  49 92 Yo    49 92  o  3 48    70 96      Recording   Fuzzy   Continuous Sample  Continuous Sample  Continuous Sample  Continuous Sample  Continuous Sample  Continuous Sample  Continuous Sample  Continuous Sample  Continuous Sample        41      Shows the current logging status of all pens within the system       Pen   Displays the Pen number and will display a tick when recording and a cross when    recording has stopped       Value   Displays the current pen value      Method   Displays Sample  Max Min or Average logging      Log Rate   Displays the Log rate set  in Hertz  A tick denotes if it is enabled and a star will    indicate the current log rate       Alarm Rate   Displays the alar
228. r dimensions    Installation Instructions  e Minimum panel thickness   2mm  0 078      max   20mm  0 78      e Both recorders must be inserted from the front of the panel     e Two mounting clamps are supplied and can be fixed either on the top and bottom  sides or on the left and right sides of the case     43 TV 25 30 Iss 2 GLO June 06 UK       1 874  ies Fea Es       10    Mechanical Installation    Panel Mounting Clamp Installation    The Minitrend QX and the Multitrend SX recorders slide into the panel cut out and are held  in place by two  or four  panel clamps  The panel clamps should be fitted on diagonally op   posite sides of the unit and tightened against the rear of the panel using two fixing screws     The mounting clamp assembly and fitting instructions differ slightly for the two recorders   Minitrend QX    1     Insert the panel gasket onto the recorder so it goes between the back of the  recorder bezel and the panel  From the front panel  place unit in the panel and  push through the panel       To loosen each clamp  unscrew the long screw to accommodate the panel    thickness       From behind the panel  the orientation of the clamp should be with the screw    head towards the rear of the unit  See Figure 2 1 on page 11      Take the first clamp and locate the two lugs on the clamp into the slots on the    unit  See Figure 2 1 on page 11      Take the second clamp and do the same but in the diagonal position to the    opposite side  See Figure 2 3 on page 8 
229. r this channel     _ Range   Displays the current Range Type set for this channel  eg     12V     Calibration   Displays the type of calibration for this channel either Factory or User Cal    Sample Rate   Displays the current Sample rate for this channel       SQRT   If ticked the square root extract is enabled on this channel to linearise a non linear  input       Sensor Comp   This will display if any type of sensor compensation applied to this chan   nel       Pen   Displays which Pen scale is being used to display this analogue input     e CJC   Only for Thermocouple inputs  Displays the final adjusted value of a Cold Junction  Calibration on this channel in degrees C     Go Back to return to the previous screen or select Print to print the screen     102 43 TV 25 30 Iss 2 GLO June 06 UK    Analogue Out   Main Menu  gt  Status  gt  Diagnostics  gt  Analogue Out        Channel   Displays the Slot position  eg  B  E or F  the Analogue Output number and the  system channel position  This will show a tick if this channel is enabled     TX Pen   Displays which pen is transmitting the signal  e Range   Displays the Output range set  A tick here will indicate this is overrange       Output   Displays the current Analogue Output reading for this channel     Go Back to return to the previous screen or select Print to print the screen     Alarm Digital 10   Main Menu  gt  Status  gt  Diagnostics  gt  Digital 10     Channel   Displays the Slot position  eg  G  H or I  the Digital I
230. ration    on page 151     5  When the realtime data is being run  eg  graphed to the application server software  or  an OPC client  this will enable the bottom window that will display details of the data     Add a Database  To add a database to a server  right click on the server eg  Local Server  select Add Data   base and complete the dialog box details for the name and description of the device     Add a Database Server    1  Use the database icon with a   sign in the top left of the comms server window     2  Right click on Database Servers in the top left window    Connect to a Database Server  1  Select    Database Servers    in the left window and then right click on the server to be  connected in the servers list in the main window     2  Connect to database server dialog box will appear  enter an IP address and a descrip   tion to identify the database server     Delete a Database Server    1  Right click on the database server to be removed and select the delete option     2  Adialog box will appear with the IP address of the database server to be deleted  If this  is correct  click on OK     All database servers can be removed except for the Local Server     43 TV 25 30 Iss 2 GLO June 06 UK 149    150    Communications Server    Add a Device    There are three ways to add a device  they all deliver the same dialog box     1  Use the device icon in the top left of the comms server window     2  Right click on a selected Comms port in the left window  COM1 to COM8 
231. rd Max   Set the maximum amount of characters that can be used for the Pass   word login   1 to 20 characters  6 to 20 for ESS recorders        Username Min   Set the minimum amount of characters that can be used for the User  name login   1 to 20 character and 0 will disable  4 to 20 characters and no disable for ESS  recorders       Password Min   Set the minimum amount of characters that can be used for the Password  login   1 to 20 characters and 0 will disable  6 to 20 characters and no disable for ESS  recorders        Min Alpha   Set the minimum amount of alpha characters to be used in the Password   0 to  20 characters       Min Symbol   Set the minimum amount of symbol characters to be used in the Password    0 to 20 characters     43 TV 25 30 Iss 2 GLO June 06 UK 81    e Min Numeric   Set the minimum amount of numeric characters to be used in the Password    0 to 20 characters     e Pass Retries   Set how many times the incorrect password can be entered before the user  account is locked out   1 to 10 retries and 0 will disable  1 to 6 retries and no disable for  ESS recorders     e Pass Expiry   Set how many days before the current passwords will expire   1 to 365 days  and 0 will disable  For ESS recorders 1 to 180 days and no disable        Expiry Warning   Set how many days before the passwords expiry date that a warning  notice will appear   1 to 20 days and 0 will disable  no disable for ESS recorders   When the configuration is complete select the Finish butt
232. re  and later a cooling period back down again to  ambient temperature  more like the profile shown in Figure 2 on page 209  During all  this heating up  holding at temperature  and subsequent cooling  micro organisms are being  killed at different rates  and the Fg value is calculated by summing the effect at each tem   perature  provided it is over some defined starting temperature   see below      This calculation is performed by using the expression  where T is the temperature in   C and  At is the time spent at that temperature  The z factor that appears in this equation is the tem   perature coefficient for the destruction of micro organisms  and is the increase in tempera   ture  in   C  that produces a 10 fold increase in sterilisation rate     This summation is only performed once the sample temperature has reached some speci   fied starting temperature  For example in Figure 2 on page 209 if this starting tempera   ture has been set to 100   C  a common value  then the Fo summation would begin at t   8  minutes when the temperature first reaches this value     43 TV 25 30 Iss 2 GLO June 06 UK 209    210    Because of this small  but increasing contribution to Fy once T reaches 100   C  and the fact  that in this trace the temperature exceeds 121 11  C  the F  value reaches 15 at time t   20  minutes  at which point the sterilisation is complete  and cooling begins    For some applications it is allowed to report the Fy value that is finally achieved as  the sample c
233. rent users that have been entered into the password system  The Admin    istrator can unlock a user that has been timed out  eg  password expiry  by selecting a user   from a drop down list  Select the user and choose Re enable Current or Reset to Default   Reset Passwords    Main Menu  gt  Configure  gt  Passwords  gt  User Admin  gt  Reset Password     This will produce a text box warning that if you reset the passwords all the current settings  will be lost and the password system will return to the factory default setting  Select whether  to Continue or Stop the reset procedure     Change Passwords     Main Menu  gt  Configure  gt  Passwords  gt  Change Passwords     The Change Password function can be accessed by all users  Select Change Password and  enter your user name and old password  you will then be prompted to enter your new pass   word and again to confirm     Settings     Main Menu  gt  Configure  gt  Settings  gt      Set Time     Main Menu  gt  Configure  gt  Settings  gt  Set Time     Set up the Time and Date for the recorder   s real time clock  Check that the correct Time  Zone is set before setting the clock  See    Localisation    on page 69   Date  Select each button to set the day  month and year  This will automatically update and be  displayed on the Menu bar at the top of the process screen    Time  HH MM SS   Select each button to set the hours  minutes and seconds  The hours selection provides a  list and the minutes and seconds require a numeric 
234. required protocol from the Protocol menu eg   Modbus  Diagram shows a view looking from the rear of  the unit  See    Comms Menu    on page 61     Ethernet       1 2 3  OO                 A  B GND    The Ethernet port uses a standard RJ45 Ethernet connection  After connection  select the  Ethernet port from the Comms menu and select the required protocol from the Protocol    menu eg Modbus     J                                                      Al AIS  cc ERIE    RJ45 Pin 1 is to the right  from the rear of the unit    24V DC Instrument Power Input    3 way connector  Diagram shows a view looking from the rear    of the unit     43 TV 25 30 Iss 2 GLO June 06 UK                                        2 4 6 8  OO  Gien  1 3 5 7  OA BO  12 8  O 0O 0O      GND    23    24    Electrical Installation    SPNC Relay     Single Pole Normally Closed   2 way connector  This is a fail safe  relay which means if the power goes off the relay closes and can be  set to trigger an alarm  So should the power fail the relay is in a    fail  safe    condition  Diagram shows a view looking from the rear of the  unit  Either pins can be Common or Normally closed        O   On             NOTE  Once the recorder is powered up  if there are no active alarms associated with the     Fixed Relay     the contacts will open  When the alarm is on they will close    USB Devices    For a list of the latest compatible USB devices  go to  www XSeries info net    Print Support    Print Support is a firmware
235. rman   Italian  Portuguese  Braz   Polish  Slovakian and Turkish     e Logarithmic Scales   all displayed scales can be set as linear or logarithmic  max 99  decades       Enclosure rating   standard NEMA 3   IP55 type front face protection  NEMA 4X   IP66  available as an option     e Fuzzy Logging   this standard feature provides a unique method to increase the storage  capacity of the recorder  The data is monitored to determine changes in process data  if no  changes are observed data is logged periodically  If data is changing rapidly  it is recorded  normally at the programmed rate  By not logging data that is static  data compression of up  to 100 1 or more can be achieved saving valuable memory       Security tag      wire seal provision    provides added security to seal the front door and rear  when using optional rear cover to prevent undetected entry to these areas of the recorder        USB Ports   Front and rear USB host ports for data and setup transfers or remote screen  through these ports  Attach external devices  keyboard or mouse         Replay with Zoom   Select replay mode and zoom in on a specific area on the screen  The  data can easily be replayed at the recorder with the ability to    zoom     The touch screen  makes it fast to review and analyse historical data     Options   Hardware       Alarm  amp  Digital IO Cards   4 or 8 outputs relay contacts SPCO 240V  8 I O or 16 I O    SPNO 24VDC  Programmable alarm set points can be configured to activate
236. rom the web site at  www  XSeries info net     Insert the Compact Flash or USB key with the latest revision of Firmware   xsu file format   and press the FW Upgrade button  The recorder will scan and check the files on the external  device with the current version running in the recorder  Any later version files on the external  device are copied into the recorder     See    Storage Media Format    on page 90 for formatting information of Compact Flash  cards and USB keys     To check the firmware upgrade has been successful  see the Status Menu     General    on  page 97    Calibration   Configure  gt  Setup  gt  Edit Setup gt  General  gt  Factory  gt  Calibration     Cards will be calibrated in the factory  All ranges are factory calibrated and set to the default  range of    12V     Date  amp  Type of last calibration is stored in    Maintenance    on page 99   Analogue In and CJC Calibration can be performed per slot  card   Select the Al or CJC cal   ibration button to go to the next menu    Al Calibration    In this menu there is a button for each Analogue Input card fitted in the recorder  Calibration  is done per channel     Cards may be reset to original    factory    cal  i e  a card holds two sets of calibration constants   factory  amp  user  for all ranges     Factory Cal   The recorder is calibrated in the factory  These are pre stored calibration val   ues that cannot be changed by the user  If the recorder is re calibrated to a User Cal the  factory values ca
237. rp drops in pressure and flow rate  and it was nec   essary to find the cause of the problem     The recorder had to have a fast scan rate  in order to capture the    glitches        The recording period would be over many days if not weeks  so storage capacity was ata  premium     A fast scan rate using the standard sampling method would result in a disk life of about a  day  which was not acceptable     As this application consists of long periods of little activity  relatively constant flow rate   and  short periods of high activity  rapidly changing flow rate   itis ideally suited to Fuzzy Logging     During the hours of stable flow where the flow rate remained more or less constant  the  Fuzzy Logging technique would give compression ratios up to 100 times  However  as soon  as a glitch appeared the fast sampling rate was able to capture and store all the points     Example 2   Cold Storage Temperature Measurement    A recorder was required to help track random and rapid temperature changes within the cold  storage rooms  Conventional sample recording had shown that temperature variations were  present  but was not of high enough resolution to pinpoint the cause     Again as in example 1   the measured inputs would show long periods of stable constant  readings  interspersed with small sharp increases in temperature  In order to track the cause  of these variations  it was necessary to maximise the time resolution of the data  This appli   cation was ideally suited to th
238. rsreresrs 37  Local Stun gs  nren ia 36  LOPOMOT   ses sisicccssedisinsctesenvectvcsees aan hs ana 36  Main Men  52 5 one a dette  38  Main Menu ACCESS ner 35  Menu Path e ccceccccecccsccsecsscsscscsscsscsssssessssseseees 37  Recording Ment    nssr 90  Device Selection    essesesssessesesesssesesesrererisrererrsrsreresrs 91  EXPO NOW sienne hennnin id 91  Export pusy  HEht ss users cn 91  Recording Methodology ou    eects 90  Scheduled Export oo    eeeeeseseseeseeeeesenees 91  RECONNU dard 101  Remote Control Viewer  Overview nr 29  Remote Networks  COMMS Server mn  Remote Viewer nn  Replay teehee ciciccceeninites a Rontncaiine  Reset Passwords  Reset Setup  siateancinciio ane nauaien amnion  Resistance Thermometers    eccccccscccsscsceseeesceeeees 16  S  DIN Pe AEE TEE EEA AE EET EES  Client   Server Network  SPCO Relay menant  SX Standard Screens  OVETVIEW  ER RER nd aa  NL    ae ee ae  Hazardous Voltage  Static Electricity             ae  D YINDOIS  sernpre orn RE mire       221    Safety Guidelines soon done 213  Safety and Symbol Identification 0 0    3  SAVE LAYOU   ccnitncincnisennorasauen nace tins 79  Save Setup sic ssvlactie actcta ioc tohuckieptadeshceiicsaei dv baie 40  IO eV Ia Ra eens 52  Scheduled Export ven 91  Screeen Activity  Deviation Alarm Markers         eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 125  Screen Activity  Alarm Markers o   ceecesessssseeeseseseeeeeeesteteneteeneees  Charts Speeds  254 inner animent  Mark on Chart ossessi  Pen Pointers on   eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteees  S
239. s 133  Comms Configuration     esessesessesoesesoesesoeseesesoesessossesossesossossesoesesossessoseesossesoe 133  Standard Communication Interfaces    133    og 0  C0160    eee 134  USB  Barcode Reader  ere sities a esegl bee shee ke hia esheets 135  Comms and Trend Manager Pro Suite  e seseeseseesoesesoesesoesosseeoeseeooseeeoreeseeoesee 135  Software Installation niesione niinen nn ne tis  SYSTEM VEU oe ais senate MR seeks ein nes aves sates bach steel Re  Data logging and transfer  PC Ethernet connection Ses ione areri en hasta seiieanas sce doh E S s 136  Getting connected   IP Address    ss 137  Local Area Network setups serienn anaa aiei enii 138  Links to Remote Networks    iii 139  OPC Interface   Open Process Control    ss 140  OPCCheEntS ee rein MEN MERS ARR ET  142  Web Browsef x20  Re tant ne ees es sie a adnate ages 142    iv 43 TV 25 30 Iss 2 GLO June 06 UK    Communications SerVer      ccccscsccrccscsssccrcssssssccccscsssssccscssesssscscssessssccssssssees  Comms Server OVervieW weccccccssssccccssssscccesssncecesssaceccsssacecessssescessseeecessnaeeccesseeeess  Comms Server Status Screen               Comms  Server SOUDE LR neue a dura nsaes TAA ent pan oder condo rate  Comms Server Database ren  SS VSLETIUS CIUP ccc trs E tente nine er nent nn ns Es ed A ete er se berne Re eine  Section 9  PC Software Suite un nmrnnmnnornnnnnnnnnnnnnnnne 155  The TrendManager Pro Software Suite    155  Section  10  Spares  IST science toc diaaa raean iani kaataen aiia 157  Mini
240. s end 86  Batch Setup Batch Control    siennes 87  Recording Mental BO Sa Ea nt 90  Messages Men   sgae a N e dieu dense annee ne data ere tentent enr es 92    Process Menu    NUS Mens Ein RE nn de hier sertie teens misc entire tete  FIMISN  visssssssdcescdaassvdenssssesbcsesssassesasacesstacedescesensaseduccssedadesentaseccentcsandeceseasarectesee                Users and Groups rien etic tie Sie RH in A as ek sete dei use 105  Administrator RAR oii sith NE He et RTS AR mA EAN a ann 105  Password Policysssnssenenenenn nement 107  User Interface requirements    ss 108  Audit Trail oera catia  Be EE Mn AR E A ns 108  Level RAA IKIO EEE E AE EE E AAE T EET 109  Default Password Access    rene 111  Section 6  Screen Configuration nes 119  Process  Sereen OVELVIOW pronio arn ER A OR E A ANE 119  Menu BOT o E CE rennes One Non E A etes 120  SCr  en Menu BAR 55s teases on hich seth E A AEE EE A 121  Sereen A CLVILY Sn a R TE A A AN ENS 124  Screen Designer SCEENS     ccccrssecsserceasercedessensessearedneenesendacoensutoctensesnedassndensonsessontes 128  Section 7  Firmware Options ins nsrecienn  nssanensie  aseenmnminnlnr sirnnsiinst 129  Firmware Credit System         cccsccccsssssscsssssssssscscssccesccsscssccsesssccsescsssssscscssssssess 129  Firmware Options ssh er nn ncesed EE ER Sed 130  Applying your Firmware credits     Remote VIEWER enu ennemi ERINE setenteeteseqenabacedeh van nie  Section 8  COMMUNICATION    sss  sssscannnnr  nnnannrerennnent  nnr  earonnneneacens  anenn
241. s for individual pens   Configure   Main Menu  gt  Alarms  gt  Configure     This is a shortcut to change alarm levels  this will display all available Pens with alarms set  up  To change the configuration  select the desired pen  this will display the alarm details   Select the Edit button to change the alarm level  If the Edit button is greyed out go to the  Pens  gt  Alarms menu and select the alarm  then activate Allow Change    View   Main Menu  gt  Alarms  gt  View     This will display all available Pens with alarms set up  To view the configuration  select the  desired pen  this will display the alarm details     When complete go to Finish     43 TV 25 30 Iss 2 GLO June 06 UK 85    86    Screen Menu     Main Menu  gt  Screen  gt      The Screen Menu contains an Edit button to configure Pen Channel Mapping  Replay pre   vious data  Screen List to change the screen currently being displayed and a Clean Screen  facility        Edit   Main Menu  gt  Screen  gt  Edit     The Edit button takes you to your current process screen and displays the Edit toolbar at the  top of the screen  In Edit mode you can select items on the screen and assign channel in   formation to them  See    Channel Mapping    on page 122     Replay   Main Menu  gt  Screen  gt  Replay     The Replay button takes you to the process screen in replay mode  The Replay screen con   sists of a chart and DPMs  The chart is vertical or horizontal depending on the orientation of  the screen you are currently in
242. se Input card position for the Minitrend QX is shown in Figure 2 3 on page 13   and Figure 2 4 on page 14 for the Multitrend SX     A WARNING    HAZARDOUS VOLTAGES   Insulation from channel to channel  Normally a channel can be safely connected to a  hazardous voltage up to 300V AC common mode    with respect to earth  However   where a channel is connected to a safety low voltage circuit  an immediately adjacent  channel must be adequately insulated from hazardous voltages between 150V AC    and 300V AC max  This insulation should comprise of at least 1 5mm air gap  or a bar   rier rated greater than 1400V AC  This is to ensure that protection of the safety low  voltage circuit is fully maintained       Common Mode    voltage is a voltage applied between the whole channel and earth   not between pins on achannel  300V AC is permitted at Measurement Category CAT  Il  Overvoltage Category Il     Failure to comply with these instructions could result in death or serious injury        43 TV 25 30 Iss 2 GLO June 06 UK    Electrical Installation    Pulse Input Channel Numbers    The Pulse Input card has channels using a connector that only takes up half the length of  the connector slot  Looking from the rear of the unit the Pulse Input connector is on the right  of the slot with a blanking plate on the left     Table 2 4         Pulse Input card                                     Card Slot A Slot B Slot C Slot D Slot E Slot F  Position  Channel 1to4 9 to 12 17 to 20 25 to 28 33 
243. snsssesssssssssesessesnesissssissesisresisersese  Card Positions and Channel numbers         43  Card and Slot Positions   ccecccsecccsssssssssssssssesseees  Change Passwords iiccssscsscsssvisssessiisssesissssssinees  Channel Mapping   0     Map button oes  Channel Mapping Objects  Channel Mapping Widgets  Chart Spe  ds sesenensersinasesnssunmainiin  CROIS Ra E A  Cleaning the Recorder  Client Server Network  Commenting in Scripts  Commit Configuration  Commit Later  Configuration s    104  Comms Connections  Comms Diagnostics             217    Comms Menu Lecce Database Management Tool 0 0 2    155                                      A Date Settings sreseenirnieo eene 83  FOSS oeceennieennenniinn Daylight Saving nn  Modbus aylig Saving 69  P Default Time Zone s 37  OTS eee  SINA e eE OE Delete All Data nine 74  TOPP aan _ Delete Screen ciececcecsesesssssssssissssissssssssessssessssessssesesses 79  USB Comms Ports a Deviation Alarm Markers    1111000 125  WED aa E E Diagnostics  Comms Server Alarm Digital IO  Add Pens for Logging Analogue In    seses   Add a Database wees eeeeeee Analogue Out CS  Add a Database Server ce pean a  Add a Device sipisrorosissiseneprtnis Comms Server         Add a new Device oo    eeceeeeteeeeees Media a   E ENRE Dern Pulse Inputs o    ccccccccsessessessesseseseeeestessessesseseeseenees  IONES ONNECHONS neue Diagnostics Messages     sssscccvssesciecssseeesiin  Configure Database Logging      Connect to a Database oo    cceccceteeseeeeteteeeeeeees
244. ss the Calibrate button     e When the calibration is complete the icon changes to the User cal icon under the channel to  show that the channel is using the user cal     43 TV 25 30 Iss 2 GLO June 06 UK    CJC Calibration  For Thermocouple Input calibration only     There is a single CJC sensor for each Al card  but the temperature across the connector will  not be constant  The CJC calibration allows the user to compensate for temperature gradi     ent     4   cIc Calibration D    Calibrate CIC AI Slot A    Card     Offset Calibrated   Measured  3 Input No Temp Value     Temp Temp     A 1  Slot 4  1 8        27 88 28 38 60 77  A    27 88 0 30 28 17 58 70  27 88 0 20 28 08 59 33    27 88 0 10 27 98    Back             In this menu there is a button for each slot for Cold Junction Calibration  Calibration is per   formed per slot card     e    e    Select the desired slot button  If a CJC connector is not fitted a message box will appear   The CJC temperature reading is displayed in the CJ Temp column     If the known temperature is different to the recorders reading an Offset can be entered to  make an adjustment to future values  The Cold Junction temperature should be measured  at the point where the thermocouple is connected in the terminal block  Ensure the meas     ured temperature is accurate to within 0 1  C     Enter the difference between the CJ Temp on the recorder and the measured reading as  the Offset Value  The offset is added to all future readings and display
245. st them contain other items  click on the   sign to reveal the list of  items contained within  The   sign will change to a   sign when all the items are displayed   To close the list  click on the   sign     FF  Communications Server  _   5  x     Administration    ES   G2            EE  Database Servers  E A Communication Ports 160 221 36 107 Local Server Connected  fe  comi  oe    comz  se COM3    oe    coms  x    coms  x    COME  x  COM   x    coms          Ethernet       Administration    The Administration button appears in the top left of the comms server  it contains     e Shutdown Server   From here the comms server can be shut down this will disconnect  the comms server  it will also shutdown the database servers at the same time     e Preferences   The General Settings tab has an option to minimise the Server when it is  opened  The Diagnostics option that will produce an additional tab to the bottom window   this will display properties and values of a selected device  Send Recorder Events is an  option that will send any event data when an export data function is performed  The Clear  Setup Cache button will remove all setup files  Network Settings is for PC s with more  than one network card fitted to access devices on other networks  The network cards are  displayed here for selection  If the    Use NIC Default IP Address Selection    is ticked then the  first network card that was added to the list will always be selected     43 TV 25 30 Iss 2 GLO June 06 UK  
246. t have occurred  The screen will  display the Type of alarm  the Time and Date that the activity occurred and  Message details of the activity     e System   This will list a history of system messages  The screen will dis   play the Type of messages and warnings and errors that have been gener   ated by the unit  The screen will also display the Time and Date that the  activity occurred and the Message details     e Diagnostics   Examine a complete list of the recorder   s functionality and  processes since it was last powered up  The screen will display Type of  message  Time and Date that the activity occurred and the Message  details     e Security   Audit trail of entries made to secure areas such as Password  setup  including  Log on  Log off  what area has been accessed  time date  and the user name     e Users   These are messages that have been entered by the user by enter     ing a Mark on Chart  The screen will display the Type of message  Time  and Date that the activity occurred and the Message details     43 TV 25 30 Iss 2 GLO June 06 UK    Message List    All messages will conform to the following format       1 23 2006  1 23 2006  1 23 2006  1 23 2006  1 23 2006  1 23 2006  1 23 2006    1 23 2006  1 23 2006  1 23 2006    Message A    P2 Alm 2   Out of alarn 5092     P2 Alm 2   Into Alarm S092   LOCAL UI june Logoff Success  LOCAL UI june Valid Access ti  LOCAL UI june Valid Access ti  LOCAL UI june Login SuccessF  P2 Alm 1   Out of alarmm 4057              LOC
247. t line made up of say 10 points can be equally well  represented by 2 points  one at either end  the other 8 points are redundant  Fuzzy logging  works by creating straight lines in the data and discarding redundant points     What s it for     Sears To help the user in the trade off between  Scan Rate  Disk capacity and Recording    Time  after all the    Pie    is only so big   Fuzzy Logging has been developed to help  maximise all three sections  in effect increas     ing the size of the    Pie        The Recording    Pie                 Scan Rate E Storage Capacity  The result is a technique that delivers a host Recording Period    of real world benefits over the more traditional  recording methods                       1  Disks take longer to fill     changed less frequently  less site visits     2  Faster scan rates can be used for any given disk size     giving greater resolution on the  process       Recording time can be extended     Less hard disk memory required for archiving on the PC       Quicker graphing of data     O a A Q      Smaller data files for remote collection     How does it work   Fuzzy Logging does not log data points that form part of a straight line   The technique is best illustrated by the diagram below     43 TV 25 30 Iss 2 GLO June 06 UK 205       206    Input Signal    Continuously Sampled  data     LS    12 points only  a gt         Fuzzy Logged data     Qa  en       Q  N7 F       Changing    slope    requires  more data points to be logged 
248. tabase and held ona  database server  Remote servers can be added to the comms server to allow access to  remote devices on remote databases not on a local network     Software Installation    The Comms server is only available with the TrendServer software  The comms server will  auto install with the TrendServer software  For installation instructions for the TrendServ   er software  refer to the TrendManager Pro Suite manual     Upgrades    There are three software packages available  TrendViewer  TrendManager and  TrendServer    your software upgrade is for the same package the software will automat   ically over write the previous version  Local database information will not be affected and all  devices data and setups are retained  Any other remote database servers will have to be  added manually     If you have purchased a different package to what is already installed  the new software will  detect this and only make available the same package  To install a different package  first  un install the previous version  There is no need to save databases or data  these will not  be lost when un installing the previous version  Devices and data held on a local database  are retained for use with the new package as long as it is installed into the same directory     System Setup    TrendServer software is a comprehensive  versatile and easy to use communica   tions system using established Protocols to transfer data  Individual company require   ments will demand different t
249. talisers and up to 96 pens can be transmitted via OPC server  max poll rate    1 s                 178 43 TV 25 30 Iss 2 GLO June 06 UK       Specification Tables       Specification    Options          Analogue Outputs   Re transmission Outputs    optional     2 or 4 re transmission outputs available for the QX Recorder and 2  4  6 or 8 re transmission outputs  available for the SX Recorder  a pen drives each output  Analog inputs  totalised values or any math   ematical result can be re transmitted   Update Rate  250 msec all channels  Type  0 to 20   4 to 20 mA  Resolution  0 002     Accuracy   0 1  0 500Q load     0 25  5000 1KQ load  Maximum Load Resistance  1000 Ohms  Isolation  300VAC       Health Watch Maintenance  Capability    Recorder keeps track of Birth Date  Power cycles  Time On Time Off  Hi Lo CUC value  Hardware   Firmware updates  Relay operations  T C health predictor  Calibration Dates and Backlight operation        Agency Approval  optional     CSA  Optional  CSA22 2 No 1010 1 2004 Certificate Number 211230  UL  Optional  ANSI UL61010   1 2004 File   201698  FM Class 1 Division 2  optional        Transmitter Power  optional     QX Recorder has 200mA   24VDC   3VDC  SX Recorder has 1 Amp   24VDC   3VDC        Extended Security System   ESS   optional     Provides full support for 21 CFR Part 11  Includes features for entry of unique User ID   s and associ   ated passwords  timeout on inactivity  1 to 10 min    password expiration  1 to 365 days   up to 50 
250. the configuration  select the  desired pen  this will display the alarm details     When complete go to Finish to implement the new set up     43 TV 25 30 Iss 2 GLO June 06 UK 201       202 43 TV 25 30 Iss 2 GLO June 06 UK    Appendix E  Ethernet    Ethernet    Ethernet is a local area network  LAN  technology that transmits information between com   puters and other devices  at speeds of 10 or 100 million bits per second  Mbps   Each Ether   net equipped device operates independently of all other devices on the network    All devices attached to an Ethernet network are connected to a shared signalling system   Ethernet signals are transmitted serially  one bit at a time  over the shared signal channel  attached to each device     It is up to the high level protocol that is sending data over the network to make sure that the  data is correctly received at the destination device     Devices attached to an Ethernet network can send application data to one another using  high level protocol software  such as TCP IP protocol suite     High level protocols have their own system addresses  such as the 32 bit addresses used  in the current version of IP  The high level IP based networking software in a device is aware  of its own 32 bit IP address and can read the 48 bit Ethernet address of its own network in   terface  but it doesn   t know the Ethernet addresses of the other devices on the network     To discover the Ethernet addresses of other IP based devices on the network anot
251. tions             Credits ed nie Lies tnt ca DC Power nesesscseseseneee algal alae ana aia  Digital IO Card Connections  FUSES oieeeecccccceesesesesseeeeeseseeeseeeseeeeeeeees  Installation Category  Pulse Input Card  D SPCO Relay                st  Signal WINNS   cag mnnnmnrntr tin  Transmitter Power Supply Card oe 19  DC Input 24V bas 23 ahs  ee ee are 2 tne ata wean E EEEE E EA Seen serena EE PE LE  ee renee 65 Ethernet Appendix E  ata Storage Events Menu senn  OVETVI  N Les heer dieses de Rainn eer 28 Export Now    218 43 TV 25 30 Iss 2 GLO June 06 UK    F                 F sub zero Sterilisation Appendix G              209  Factory Calibration tease 71  Factory Ment    sssri 70  AI Calibration occ _    71  CJC Calibration wee aa a3  Cali bratiOn sistas tee Mamadatanns  11  Credits  sisisi ee nor raies nE     70  Daylight Saving oer     69  Firmware Upgrade ow tee    71  Language arsura      69  Line HZ sesrcinininroissisis     70  Temp Units oe      69  TimeZone   shinosshemerne 169  Field IO Menu sans 42  Alarm Relay     ccccccsseeteeeeees     47  Alarm Digital IO we     47  Analogue In Menu   n sssssssseeseesee 44  Analogue Out oe     46  Digital TO pserosssisuisanissnis das    47  Pulse Input  ssiissssmnminmt  ersnniniens ns 49  Field IO Specification ceecsecccesssccssssssssssessssessssves 169  Analogue Output se  Pulse Input Card  PG Fae en  COMME sheet  Commit Later bast  Discard  nd Rainette  Firmware Credit System cece  Firmware Options    a s     Firmware Credit 
252. to 36 41 to 44  number       Pulse Input Connection Details    Do not connect anything to terminals marked NC  Not Connected   For Frequency and Volt   age levels see    Specification Tables    on page 173        Channel 1   Channel 2 Channel 3  Channel 4                        Oo oO  m   m   m  oO oO Oo o  m   m  Oo                                                        NC     NC     NC     NC    Transmitter Power Supply Card    The Minitrend QX Transmitter power supply option is                24V DC 200 mA and is fitted to the power supply card 24V OV   within the unit  Connection is made via a 2 way connector   at the rear of the unit  the mating half is supplied with this O O   option  For connector position see Figure 2 3 on   page 13  The 24V transmitter power supply is not isolat  Minitrend 24V DC TXP    ed from the recorder  and is not referenced to ground    The Multitrend SX Transmitter power supply option is 24V DC 1 A and is fitted below the  power supply card within the unit  Connection is made via two 10 way connectors  see Fig   ure 2 4 on page 14  mating halves supplied with this option  The Multitrend SX transmitter  power supply is isolated from the recorder     A red LED light will illuminate when there is voltage on the connectors this is situated be   tween the two connectors at the back of the unit  Figure 2 4 on page 14     Recommended wire size for termination connector 22 12 AWG  22 14 SWG      43 TV 25 30 Iss 2 GLO June 06 UK 19    20    Electrical 
253. to be assigned  Select the device ID number  if necessary   from the drop down menu     The next section is Database Configuration  a list of connected database servers and a list  of databases that are currently being logged to  In this section is a window showing the  channels available to be logged  As channels are selected from this window  three additional  buttons become active     Add Channel selection     select each channel for logging     Add all  Channels    for logging and Clear Channel selection     43 TV 25 30 Iss 2 GLO June 06 UK 151    Comms Server Database    Logging Configuration       Port Number  Ether nat     Device ID Number   1 7       Database Configuration  Connected Database Servers Database Currently Logging To       Initial Database    Channels available to be logged    Add Channel Selection    Add All Channels    Input Reg Ch  10 a Clear Channel Selection      Inout Rea Ch  11          Edit Channel    Input Reg Ch  1 Sample  Input Reg Ch  2 Sample Delete Channel      Input Reg Ch  3 Sample  Input Reg Ch  4                      Summary of all changes Apply  Cancel         Add Channels for Logging    As each channel is selected  or all channels depending on the button selected  the Logging  Channel Configuration box appears so the Log Rate and Type of logging can be set for each  channel individually or all channels     When the channels have been selected they will appear in the bottom window  click on Ap   ply to enable the channels to log  Once t
254. to output 4 20 mA loop  This will take the  scale value from the pen it is transmitting and convert to 4 20mA output sig   nal  eg if the scale is 0 50  this signal will fit the scale so 4mA   0  and  20mA   50   For 0 20mA output signal with the same 0 50  scale  this  would read OmA   0  and 20mA   50      e Output   Select either 4 20mA or 0 20mA     e Label   Select and enter an identification label  Select and use the on   screen keyboard  Up to 16 characters     When the configuration is complete select the Finish button to Commit  Discard or Commit  Later  Select the Back button to return to the previous menu     Alarm   Digital 10   Main Menu  gt  Configure  gt  Setup  gt  Edit Setup gt  Field IO  gt  Alarm Digital IO     The Alarm Digital IO button will display all the digital inputs outputs available  Click on each  individual Alarm IO or Digital IO number to set up each channel profile     Cards available are   2 types of Alarm Relay cards     4 Alarm Relay Output     8 Alarm Relay Output with 2 Digital Inputs  2 types of Digital IO cards     8 Digital Inputs or Outputs     16 Digital Inputs or Outputs    Alarm Relay Card  4 Alarm relay output card or 8 Alarm relay Output with 2 Digital Inputs  6 fixed outputs and  2 configurable Digital Input or output  cards    Digital IO Card    There are 8 or 16 Digital channels per card that can be setup as inputs or outputs  The Dig   ital I O card also has 4 channels that can be set as pulse inputs  channels 1 to 4   The op 
255. tre     4  Where conductive pollution such as condensation or conductive dust is present  ade   quate air conditioning  filtering and or sealing must be installed     5  This recorder contains one battery on the Processor board which must be treated and  disposed of with care  Batteries must not be short circuited  Batteries should be dis   posed of in accordance with local regulations  they must not be disposed of with normal  refuse     6  Improper signal and supply wiring   WARNING       WARNING    IMPROPER SIGNAL AND SUPPLY WIRING   Signal and supply wiring should be kept separate  Where this is impractical  shielded cables should  be used for the signal wiring  Where signal wiring is carrying  or could carry under fault conditions   hazardous voltage  defined as  gt 30 V rms and 42 4 V peak  or  gt 60 Vd c    double insulation must  be used for all signal wiring     Failure to comply with these instructions could result in death or serious injury                 7  Ifthe equipment is used in a manner not specified by the manufacturer  the protection  provided by the equipment may be inadequate     8  The protective earth terminal must remain connected  even if the recorder is isolated  from the mains supply  if any of the measuring  communications  or relay terminals are  connected to hazardous voltages    Hazardous Voltage    Hazardous Voltages are defined by EN61010 1 as follows     A WARNING    HAZARDOUS VOLTAGE LEVELS  Voltage levels above 30V rms and 42 4V peak or 6
256. trend OX RECOVER hs nn ns nt nee lie nine SA 157  M  ltirend SX Recorder  aa aa nn einen eee 161  Section 11  Instrument Care and Maintenance               cscesseesteessseeeeeneeeees 167  Cleaning Instructions             ccscsssssssesscsssssscscscsssscesssssssesenesssssensessssssssnssesseess 167  Backlight    Hassan sdtsssaseossdesoonssecsesavosanosesseussssdeasooassunscessoshevsasessoeeeses 167  Operating Temperature           ccccccsscscccssescscscscecsscccesssccsesesecssscscsessssesssessessoess 167  Touch Screen      sscscccsrssssscscsessrcercscsscssrseesenserscesecsesecssccsessesescscsscsssssssecsesesseees 167  Calibration       s  rcrorssrsrsererserersesersersesersesessessssessnsccsnsessrsesessesensecenseseneesessnsonees 168  Section 12  Technical Data  amp  Specifications              cccsseeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 169  Field IO Specifications 169  Analogue Input   ssesssssccassessdscsanassensacecssoccoadceasdaudsecceseosasnscesasaatescessastonscdssasoss 170  Alarm Digital Input Specification  ss eseseseseseeoesesecosoeseoesosorecoesesecosoesesesososeeoe 170  Alarm Relay Output Card Options sise 170  Digital Input CArdS    c cccsccococrsncensescescesvesebsepses ceccdecneodecvecuesseessehiostestes costes dented iS 171  Specification Tables  Specification Design Attributes    oeoo  Specification Analogue Inputs      Specification Logging nissan  Specification Physical Parameters                 ss 176  Input Range Performance Accuracy Table    ss 177  Input Actuation
257. ts appearance changed to create an individual pres   entation  The X Series Screen Designer software package is compatible with Minitrend QX and  Multitrend SX recorders  Layouts can be transferred on to single or multiple recorders of the same  type  which contributes to continuity and standardization of process data  For use with X Series re   corders only     Firmware can be upgraded from the web site at www XSeries info net     43 TV 25 30 Iss 2 GLO June 06 UK 155       Minimum System requirements for TrendViewer   TrendManager Pro and X Series Screen Designer     Minimum System requirements for TrendServer Pro           1GHz Pentium processor or higher    1GHz Pentium processor or higher       CD ROM drive    CD ROM drive       Monitor screen resolution 800 x 600 recommended minimum  high  colour    Monitor screen resolution 1024 x 768 recommended minimum   high colour       Windows    2000  XP  NT ver  4 0 Service pack 6 onwards    Windows    2000  XP  NT ver  4 0 Service pack 6 onwards          512 Mbyte of RAM    512 Mbyte of RAM       16 bit colour graphics  24 bit recommended  Screen Designer only     TCP IP installed       50 Mbyte free hard disk space    2 Gbyte Hard drive free disk space       A mouse    A mouse       Flash card reader or USB port       Flash card reader or USB port          156    43 TV 25 30 Iss 2 GLO June 06 UK       Minitrend QX Recorder     gt  oo oe       COMODO O     amp        43 TV 25 30 Iss 2 GLO June 06 UK 157       Ethernet          a
258. uit  an immediately adjacent  channel must be adequately insulated from hazardous voltages between 150V AC and    300V AC max  This insulation should comprise of at least 1 5mm air gap  or a barrier  rated greater than 1400V AC  This is to ensure that protection of the safety low voltage  circuit is fully maintained     Common Mode voltage is a voltage applied between the whole channel and earth  not  between pins on a channel  300V AC is permitted at Measurement Category CAT Il   Overvoltage Category Il     Failure to comply with these instructions could result in death or serious injury        Analogue Output Channel Numbers    The Analogue Output cards are either 2 or 4 channels using a connector that only takes up  half the length of the connector slot  Looking from the rear of the unit the Analogue Out con   nector is on the left of the Analogue slot with a blanking plate on the right     43 TV 25 30 Iss 2 GLO June 06 UK 17    18    Electrical Installation    Table 2 3         Analogue Output card             Card Slot B Slot E Slot F  Position  Channel 9 to 12 33 to 36 41 to 44  number                      Analogue Output Connection Details    Output 1   Output 2   Output 3   Output 4                                              Loop   NC LOOP     Loop    Loop   Loop  NC Loop  Loop  NC    NC   Not connected    Pulse Input Card    The Pulse Input card connections are made via 1 x 12 way screw terminal plugs that fits  into a PCB header on the rear of the unit     The Pul
259. up  gt  Comms  gt  TCP IP     Transmission Control Protocol Internet Protocol     A protocol for communication between computers  recorders and other devices     Static IP   Toggle On and Off  This is an IP address which is the same  every time     IP Address    Available when Static IP is On   This is an identification  address for communications between two peripherals  The IP Address  identifies a specific recorder or device  Select and enter a valid IP address     Sub Net Mask    Available when Static IP is On   Acts as a filter when iden   tifying an IP address    Gateway    Available when Static IP is On   A configuration parameter  transmitted to each network device    DNS WINS MDNS   Set to Automatic  click on this to activate and de acti   vate options  DNS   Domain Name System  WINS   Windows Internet  Name Service  MDNS   Managed Data Network Services  See    DNS   WINS MDNS    on page 65    43 TV 25 30 Iss 2 GLO June 06 UK    e Ports   The Port numbers are associated with the IT system in use  Port  numbers are set to a default but can be changed by the user to allow data  traffic to use a specified port  See    Ports    on page 65    When the configuration is complete select the Finish button to Commit  Discard or Commit  Later  Select the Back button to return to the previous menu     DNS WINS MDNS     Main Menu  gt  Configure  gt  Setup  gt  Edit Setup  gt  Comms  gt  TCP IP  gt  DNS WINS MDNS     Set to Automatic  click on this to activate and de activate opti
260. ut  DiaQ MOStics  anann n e  Signal Wiring  Analogue Out Menu sssrin 46  Analogue Output Card eccccsssccccccscececccsieseses 17  Channel Numbers  Connection Details                      DIASNOSTICS ossei nr asarni EEEREN RES  Analogue Output Specifications                   169  Appendix A Quality and Safety                   181  Appendix B Maths Expressions 000    183  Appendix C Thermocouple Connections  197  Appendix D Alarms  oeccsseccccssiccccssiisesssisseesiees 201  Appendix E Ethernet ariasicnucicnnemamie  203  Appendix F Fuzzy Logging vices 205  Appendix G F sub zero Sterilisation            209  Appendix H Calibration ec  211  Appendix I Battery Data sis 213  Appendix J   Function Codes and Memory Maps                  215    43 TV 25 30 Iss 2 GLO June 06 UK    B    B  cklighis rase nano douane 167  Barcodes for Batch same 75  Batch Commands  Batch Mark on Chart ciecceeccccccccssscssssssesssssseeseevees 88  Batch Menu res  Barcodes for Batch    o s  Batch Setup Control  Batch Commands oo  e eccccccccccccescsscssssscssssseseeeees  Batch Mark on Chart  Battery Data  Safety Guidelines oe eeseeseeseeeeeeeeeees 213  Battery Data Appendix l        ss  22012250112202 2  213  Battery Safety  Processor Board  ss 213  Brightness             CE MATR nier  CJC Calibration    ss  CJC Connectors neue  Cables ss  Calibration                AI Calibration  Appendix H             CJC Calibration  Maintenance o     cceccceeeseeeseteeeeeeees  Sensor Compensation  User Calibration     
261. ver software can be run independently to the main application software by  creating a shortcut to the Startup folder  If over writing a previous version of X Series comms  server  only the local server will retain the database information and load all the devices and  settings from the databases  Any other remote database servers will have to be added man   ually    Comms Server   new user   Using the comms server from scratch requires    1  Add a new device to a Communications port  Devices will appear under the Communi     cations Port  when selected  in the left window and will appear in the initial database on  the local comms server  See    Add a Device    on page 150     2  Click on    Communication Ports    in the left window to display a list of the ports in the  main window  Tick the port that the device has been added to  See    Communication  Ports    on page 147     3  For a realtime connection  check device connection status by clicking on the device  under its comms port in the left window to display the device status in the top main win   dow  Green LED   s will show a realtime connection is made  If grey LED   s are showing  and the device displays    Unconnected    and if Red LED   s display then there is a problem  with connection     4  The data from this device can now be logged to a database by using the Configure log   ging screen and setting up channels for logging with the log rate and type and setting  up a destination database  See    Logging Configu
262. vice is selected from the top window details of the device   s activity is  displayed here  Device logging to a database will display details in the Database logging tab   Realtime data will display in the Client connections tab  The Diagnostics tab can be activat   ed by going to Administration  Preferences and ticking the Show Diagnostics box  this will  display properties and vales of a selected device     Communication Ports    The Communication Ports is a list of ports available  COM1 to COM8 and Ethernet  As de   vices are added they are displayed under the port name  Click on Communication Ports to  display a list of all the ports in the main window  tick the required port to enable  Click on a  port and the main window splits into two windows  top and bottom     The top window displays details of the devices using that port including device ID No   de   vice Name  Mode and Status show if the device is connected  how many Channels the  device has enabled  an Active button to activate the device and the device   s  P Address   As devices get added to each port they will display in the list for that particular port     43 TV 25 30 Iss 2 GLO June 06 UK 147    148    Communications Server    Destination    Client connections Local Client  1  Input Reg Ch  1 Sample  5   Local Client  1  Input Reg Ch  2 Sample  tab displays realti me Local Client  1  Input Reg Ch  3 Sample    commsrunningonthe   19 Input Reg ch  4 Sample    Client connections   Database logging    72    serv
263. y entered     e Description Required   Tick to make this a requirement when starting a new batch    43 TV 25 30 Iss 2 GLO June 06 UK      Comment Required   Tick to make this a requirement when starting a new batch    Lot Required   Tick to make this a requirement when starting a new batch      Allow Direct Access   Allows use of a Barcode reader to make entries for all the items  listed in this menu     Barcodes for Batch   Batch markers can be created using independent barcode software  The barcodes can  then be read using a barcode wand or reader  Any type of Batch marker can be encoded  into a barcode using the same control characters used to build up a batch marker     MS 216  A Fred   C Test    This example shows a barcode encoded to start a batch     S   Start Batch   216   Batch Name   IN   User ID is Fred     C   Comment text is Test    A barcode with up to 25 characters  including spaces  can be read into the recorder using  a USB ASCII barcode reader    Printer Menu   Configure  gt  Setup  gt  Edit Setup gt  General  gt  Printer     The Printer function is a firmware option that is selectable from the Factory menu  gt     Crea   its    on page 70  The screens that currently can be printed are all the items under the Status  button  For more information on these screens see the    Status Menu    on page 96     The Printer menu allows configuration for setting up a printer  The printer option displays a  Print button from various screens using a basic USB standard PL
264. ypes of protocols dependant on the size and criteria of the  communications system network  To help decide which protocol is suitable for each  setup  see    Protocols    on page 134    43 TV 25 30 Iss 2 GLO June 06 UK 135    136    Comms and Trend Manager Pro Suite    Data logging and transfer    Using the TrendServer software  the device   s details are added on to a database in  TrendServer  Once the device has been configured and enabled  data can be retrieved   Data is logged to the internal memory  This data can be exported to TrendServer via     e Compact Flash USB  removable media    transfer setup and data  e Modbus  RS485 Ethernet    transfer data only    e FTP  Ethernet    transfer Setup and data    Exporting does not remove the data from the device but when the internal memory buffer is  full the latest data will start to over write the oldest data     Data can be imported from devices and logged to a Database  Known as    Stored and His   toric data     Databases are managed by a Database Server  The data can be retrieved   graphed  exported to spread sheets  e mailed or transferred from devices to other data   bases located on Remote Database Servers  Using the Comms Server actual current  data can be sent from a device straight to the server using Ethernet or RS485 links  This  actual current data can then be logged to a database and viewed on a graph in real time   this is Known as    Realtime    data  Different types of data  realtime  logged and historic dat
265. ystem    Credits can be applied as desired to the Firmware functions until the total number of credits  purchased has been used up  See    Applying your Firmware credits    on page 130     Additional credits can be purchased later if new features are to be activated and not enough  credits are available to support these additional functions    Firmware Options    Free Form Maths and Free Form Math with Scripting  See    Appendix B  Maths Expressions    on page 183     Applying your Firmware credits    To activate the Firmware options follow this file path   Main Menu  gt  Configue  gt  Setup  gt  Edit  gt  General  gt  Factory  gt  Credits    The Credit menu contains the Serial No  of the recorder  how may credits are available  dis   plays the Options Code and lists what firmware Options are currently active        Serial No    read only and cannot be edited     e Credits   read only and cannot be edited  It displays the number of Credits available to  activate additional firmware functionality including the total credit value     e Options Code   the Options code is a unique coded number for this recorder that contains  information that enables certain functionality including credit value     e Options   Select the Options button  e This displays how may credits are currently in use     e Select Options to produce a list of Firmware options available with their credit values   The number or credits required is shown in brackets       Toggle each option On or Off to enable t
    
Download Pdf Manuals
 
 
    
Related Search
 Specification  specifications  specifications of this laptop  specifications for this computer  specifications definition  specification sheet  specifications on pc  specification meaning  specification synonym  specifications of this device  specification pattern  specification divisions  specification rubber  specification sections  specification version  specification gps navigation  specification pattern c#  specification jpa  specifications techniques  specification developer  specification spring boot 
    
Related Contents
SMC Networks SMC8126L2 User's Manual  Sony HX9V User's Manual    Copyright © All rights reserved. 
   Failed to retrieve file